HVAC

User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.

Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall
not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results
from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.

AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.

Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.

AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).

The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
HVAC User Guide

Revision Sheet

Date Version Comments / Remarks

September 2011 12.1.1 Removed old section and obsolete position and orientate cross
references.
January 2012 Copyright added to all pages.
HVAC User Guide
 HVAC User Guide

HVAC User Guide

Contents Page

HVAC
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Guide Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1

HVAC Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
HVAC Specific Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Default Detailing Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3

HVAC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Edit HVAC Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Copy ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Modify CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9

HVAC System Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

HVAC Main Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
HVAC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Create/Modify HVAC Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Choose Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3

Side Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

HVAC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Application Dataworld Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Assembly Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7

Tiles/Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Grid Setting Out Point (SOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Layout Grid from SOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Apply Tiles in Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5

Autofill With Straights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

Show Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Fill Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3

Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Automatic Itemising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Surface Area and Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Centre of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Create a Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
HVAC Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Data Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
HVAC Consistency Check Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:6
Import HVAC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9

HVAC Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:6
Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:7

Query Data Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Brief Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Item Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Detailing Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Insulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Taper Side Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Origin ............................................................. 13:3

Position PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3
Position PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
Position P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
Position PH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
Position PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5
Gap to Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5

Create HVAC Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1

Split HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Branches to Spilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Plane Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:4
Modify Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:6
Split Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:7
Reposition Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Split Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:11
Merge Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:13

Menu Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1

Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Customise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
HVAC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:5

Component Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1

Rectangular Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
Circular Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:2
Flat Oval Ductwork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:3
Shape Transformation Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:4
Branch Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:4
Inline Plant Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:5
Extra Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:6
Nozzle Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:6

© Copyright 1974 to current year. iii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
HVAC System Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Main Branch Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Side Branch (off main) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:2
Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:2
Cranked Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4
Square Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:6
Radiused Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:8
Mitred Elbow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:10
Crank Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:12
Mitred Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:14
Radiused Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:16
Radiused Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:18
TwinBend Threeway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:20
Breeches Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:22
Square Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:24
Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:26
Mesh End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:28
Material Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:29
Weather Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:31
Two Bend Setfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:33
Stiffening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:35
Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:37
Test Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:39
‘A’ Plane Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:41
‘B’ Plane Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:43
Radiused Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:45
Deflectrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:47
Internal Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:49
Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:51
Turning Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:52
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:54
Circular Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:54
Male Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:55
Circular Taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:56
Mitred Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:58

© Copyright 1974 to current year. iv 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Circular Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:60

Radiused Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:62
3 Segment Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:64
4 Segment Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:66
5 Segment Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:68
Radiused Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:70
Circular Breeches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:72
Angled Breeches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:74
Side Branch Tee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:76
Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:79
Mesh End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:80
Material Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:81
Flexible Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:82
Flexible Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:84
Roof Cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:85
Two Bend Setfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:87
Two Bend Flexfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:88
Stiffening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:89
Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:91
Saddle ............................................................ 19:93
Test Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:95
Internal Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:97
Gasket ............................................................ 19:99
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:100
Flat Oval Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:100
Male Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:101
Flat Oval Taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:103
‘A’ Plane Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:105
‘B’ Plane Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:107
‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:109
‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:111
‘A’ Plane 3 Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:113
‘B’ Plane 3 Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:115
‘A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:117
‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:119
‘A’ Plane 5 Segment A Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:121
‘B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:123
Flat Oval Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:125
Stiffening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:126
Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:128

© Copyright 1974 to current year. v 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:130
Flat Oval Gasket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:132
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:134
Square to Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:134
Square to Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:136
Round to FlatOval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:138
Oval ‘A’ to Oval ‘B’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:140
Spigot Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:142
Linear Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:144
Circ>Rect Spigot Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:146
Oval>Rect Spigot Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:148
Branch Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:150
Rectangular Boot r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:150
Rectangular Square r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:152
Rectangular Fish r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:154
Rectangular Angled r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:156
Rectangular Tapered r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:158
Circular Boot c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:161
Circular Square c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:162
Circular Fish c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:164
Circular Angled c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:166
Circular Conical c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:168
Circular Square-Round c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:170
Circular Mitred c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:172
Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:174
Flat Oval ‘B’ Boot f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:176
Flat Oval ‘A’ Square f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:178
Flat Oval ‘B’ Square f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:180
Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:182
Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:184
Flat Oval ‘A’ Angled f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:186
Flat Oval ‘B’ Angled f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:188
Inline Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:190
Rectangular Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:190
Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:192
Rectangular Control Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:194
Rectangular Motorised Damper r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:196
Rectangular Heater Battery r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:198
Rectangular Cooler Battery r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:200

© Copyright 1974 to current year. vi 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Rectangular Silencer r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:201

Rectangular Attenuated Bend r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:203
Rectangular General Plant Item r. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:205
Rectangular Grille Brco r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:207
Rectangular Grille in line r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:210
Rectangular Air Handling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:211
Rectangular Centrifugal Fan r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:214
Circular Fire Damper c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:215
Circular Flanged Fire Damper c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:217
Circular Control Damper c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:219
Circular Axial Flow Fan c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:221
Circular Silencer c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:223
Circular General Plant Item c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:225
Grille Off Brco c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:227
Circular Grille in line c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:229
Flat Oval Fire Damper f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:231
Extra Inline Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:233
Flat Low Vel’ Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:233
Corner Mount LV Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:236
Semi-C Air Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:238
Circ Air Displacement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:240
Rect Air Displacement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:242
Rect Disp Unit - Rect Conn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:244
Connection Box Circ-Circ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:246
Connection Box Circ-Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:248
Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:251
Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:253
Rect Grille - Rect Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:255
Circular Air Intake Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:257
Circular Air Extract Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:258
Equipment Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:260
Rectangular Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:260
Circular Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:262
Flat Oval Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:264
Modify Existing Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:266
User Defined Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:268
User Defined Fittings Plotfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:270
Modify User Defined HVAC Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:272
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:272

© Copyright 1974 to current year. vii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

HVAC Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1

Basic Features of the Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1
Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1
Main Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1
Side Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:2
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3
Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3
Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3
Cranked Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4
Square Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:5
Radius Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:5
Mitred Elbow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:6
Crank Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:7
Mitred Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:8
Radius Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:9
Radius Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:9
Twin Bend Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:10
Breeches Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:11
Square Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:12
Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:12
Mesh End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:13
Material Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:13
Weather Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:14
Two Bend Setfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15
Stiffener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15
Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:16
Test Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:17
‘A’ Plane Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:18
‘B’ Plane Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:19
Radius Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:20
Deflectrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:21
Internal Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:21
Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:22
Turning Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:23
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:23
Straight ............................................................ 20:23
Male Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:24
Taper ............................................................ 20:25
Mitred Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:25

© Copyright 1974 to current year. viii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Mitred Elbow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:26

Radius Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:27
3 Segment Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:27
4 Segment Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:28
5 Segment Bend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:29
Radius Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:29
Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:30
Material Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:30
Flexible Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:31
Flexible Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:31
Circular Weather Cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:32
Two Bend Setfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:32
Two Bend Flexfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:33
Circular Stiffener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:34
Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:34
Saddle ............................................................ 20:35
Mesh End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:35
Test Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:36
Internal Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:36
Gasket ............................................................ 20:37
Breeches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:37
Angled Breeches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:38
Tee Piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:38
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:39
Straight ............................................................ 20:39
Male Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:40
Flat Oval Taper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:40
End Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:41
‘A’ Plane Mitred Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:41
‘B’ Plane Mitred Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:42
‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:42
‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:43
‘A’ Plane 3 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:43
‘B’ Plane 3 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:44
‘A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:44
‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:45
‘A’ Plane 5 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:45
‘B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:46
Gasket ............................................................ 20:46
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:46

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ix 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Square to Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:47

Square to Flatoval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:47
Flatoval to Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:48
Oval A to Oval B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:48
Circular to Rectangular Spigot Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:49
Circular to Linear Plenum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:49
Circular to Rectangular Spigot Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:50
Flat Oval to Rectangular Spigot Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:50
Branch Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:51
Rectangular Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:51
Rectangular Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:52
Rectangular Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:53
Rectangular Angled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:53
Rectangular Tapered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:54
Circular Boot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:55
Circular Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:55
Circular Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:56
Circular Angled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:57
Circular Conical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:57
Square Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:58
Circular Mitred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:59
Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:59
Flat Oval ‘B’ Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:60
Flat Oval ‘A’ Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:61
Flat Oval ‘B’ Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:61
Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:62
Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:63
Flat Oval ‘A’ Angled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:63
Flat Oval ‘B’ Angled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:64
Inline Plant Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:65
Rectangular Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:65
Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:65
Rectangular Control Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:66
Rectangular Motorised Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:67
Rectangular Heater Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:67
Rectangular Cooler Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:68
Rectangular Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:68
Rectangular Attenuated Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:69
Rectangular General Plant Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:70
Rectangular Grille Off Branch Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:70

© Copyright 1974 to current year. x 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Rectangular Grille (in line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:71

Air Handling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:72
Centrifugal Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:72
Circular Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:73
Circular Flanged Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:73
Circular Control Damper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:74
Circular Axial Flow Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:75
Circular Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:75
Circular General Plant Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:76
Circular Grille Off Branch Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:76
Circular Grille (in line). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:77
Flat Oval Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:78
Extra Plant Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:78
Flat Low Velocity Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:78
Semi Circular Air Displacement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:79
Circular Air Displacement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:79
LV Terminal for Corner Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:80
Rectangular Air Displacement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:81
Rectangular Air Displacement Unit with Rectangular Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:81
Connection Box ‘Circ Inlet - Circ Outlet’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:82
Connection Box with ‘Circ Inlet - Rect Outlet’. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:82
Circular Diffuser with Circular Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:82
Rectangular Diffuser with Circular Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:83
Rectangular Grille with Rectangular Inlet’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:83
Circular Air Intake Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:84
Circular Air Extract Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:84
HVAC Equipment Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:85
Types of Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:85
Pre-defined Joints for Components of Any Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:85
Pre-defined Joints for Rectangular Components Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:87
User-defined Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:88
Types of Stiffener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:88
Pre-defined Stiffeners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:88
User-defined Stiffeners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:89
Design Parameters and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:89

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xi 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Introduction

1 Introduction

Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Designer is supplied as a module within
the AVEVA Plant suite. The HVAC application allows the user to design and detail complex
ducting networks within a full 3D environment, with the support of tools to produce a clash
free design.

1.1 Assumptions
The HVAC User Guide has been written for users familiar with HVAC design practices, who
may or may not have prior knowledge of PDMS.
It is assumed that:
• Users have a valid PDMS license and the software has been installed
• Users know how to launch the Design Module
• The user is familiar with the basic graphical user interface (GUI) features as described
in the Getting Started with Plant
• Users are familiar with HVAC design practices.

1.2 Guide Structure

The HVAC User Guide is divided into the following sections:

Introduction introduces HVAC and summarises its scope.

HVAC Designer introduces the HVAC Designer and describes design

hierarchy.

HVAC Window introduces the HVAC work area.

HVAC System Element describes the creation and modification of a HVAC System
Element.

HVAC Main Branch describes the creation and modification of a HVAC Main
Branch.

HVAC Components describes the creation and modification of a HVAC

Components.

Side Branch describes the creation and modification of a HVAC Side

Branch (off main).

Utilities describes all the available utilities available for HVAC.

Query Data Settings describes all the available query options available for HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Introduction

Create HVAC Sketches describes how to create HVAC drawings using the Draft
Module.

Split HVAC describes the Splitting and Merging Modification.

Menu Map contains a menu map for HVAC.

Work Area describes how to customise the work area.

Component Palettes gives the range of HVAC component palettes available from
the HVAC Designer GUI.

Components contains annotated illustrations of all of the HVAC

components along with a descriptions that are provided in
the catalogue database which forms an integral part of the
product.

HVAC Catalogue contains annotated illustrations of all of the HVAC

components that are provided in the catalogue database
which forms an integral part of the product.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Designer

2 HVAC Designer

To enter the HVAC Designer application from the Design Module, click Design > HVAC
Designer from the main menu bar.

Note: The HVAC Designer application can be entered direct from the Login screen. Refer
to Getting Started with Plant for further information.

2.1 Design Features

The HVAC Designer application lets the user build up and detail complex ducting networks
by selecting components from the HVAC Catalogue.
Using standard default settings, a conceptual layout can be created and analysed rapidly,
leaving the design details to a later post-approval stage.

2.2 Hierarchy
All database elements are owned by other elements, therefore elements must be created in
a strict order.
The following database elements are common to all the Design disciplines:
• World
• Site
• Zone
For more information on the generic hierarchical structure, refer to Getting Started with
Plant.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Designer

2.2.1 HVAC Specific Hierarchy

Below the ZONE level in the HVAC module, the HVAC specific elements are:
• HVAC (HVAC)
• BRANCH (BRAN)
• HVAC Component(s)
• SPOOLS (HSLIST)
• HVAC Spool

HVAC (HVAC) Element

The HVAC (HVAC) is a top level element in the Design database under which Branch
(BRAN) and Spools (HLIST) are created.

BRANCH (BRAN) Element

The Branch (BRAN) is a sequence of HVAC component elements running between two
points:
• Branch Head
• Branch Tail

HVAC Component Element

HVAC Components are single pieces of HVAC used to create a HVAC design. Refer to
HVAC Components for a full description.

SPOOLS (HLIST) Element

The Spools (HLIST) contains a collection of HVAC Spool elements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Designer

HVAC Spool Element

Each HVAC Spool is a sequence of HVAC components combined together, for ease of
fabrication.

2.3 Default Detailing Specification

The constructional details of components available from the HVAC Catalogue are
determined by the current detailing specification. To change the current detailing
specification, click on the drop-down menu located on the main menu bar.

A detailing specification is only available at a Branch level. To use different detailing

specifications within a ducting run a new branch must be created at each point where the
detailing specification changes.

Note: To create or modify a detailing specification, refer to the System Administrator or the
HVAC Administrator Guide.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Designer

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

3 HVAC Window

All of the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with the creation or
modification of HVAC are initiated from a central HVAC window which acts as a task hub.
Depending on selections made in the HVAC window the user will be presented with further
windows prompting for user input. After inputting information in these windows the user will
always be returned to the HVAC window allowing the workflow to continue.
To open the HVAC window, click Create > HVAC from the main menu bar to display the
HVAC window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

Categories
HVAC tasks are initiated by first selecting an entry from the Categories drop-down list.
These categories are standard types of HVAC provided by the application with the exception
of User Defined Fittings or Assemblies.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

Depending on the entry selected in the Categories drop-down list the Available Types
drop-down list will present the user with a different set of options.

Available Types
After selecting a category of HVAC the user can choose a specific type of HVAC element
from the Available Types list.
When a selection is made from the Available Types drop-down list a separate window will
be displayed allowing the user to input specific criteria based on what type of HVAC
component is being created. For example the user could be prompted to enter dimensions
for a straight piece of HVAC.

Note: The windows that are presented to the user are as a result of selecting an Available
Type. These are described more in detail in the following sections of this guide.

The user will not be able to select certain Available Types if the correct database hierarchy
has not been configured beforehand. For example certain HVAC elements must reside
below other elements in the database hierarchy (an overview of the database hierarchy is
described in Hierarchy).
The different combinations of selection that can be made from the Categories and
Available Types drop-down are listed in the Menu Map.
If a particular HVAC element cannot be created at the current position in the database
hierarchy the user will receive an error message summarising the problem, for example in
the following window an error explains that the element the user is attempting to create must
reside below an HVAC Branch or HVAC Component element:

After populating the windows that are opened by selecting the Available Type, the user will
always be returned to the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

3.1 Edit HVAC Attributes

The lower part of the HVAC Window contains tools allowing the user to modify the
Orientation, Position and Connection type of the HVAC component that already exists in
the Design Explorer.
Each tool acts individually so the user could for example modify the Orientation of an HVAC
component without using the Position part of the HVAC window.

3.1.1 Orientation
Use the Orientation part of the HVAC window to modify the Leave Direction and Leave ‘A’
Axis of a HVAC component.
The user must first select the element to modify, from either the Design Explorer or the 3D
View. In the example below a Rectangular Straight is highlighted in the Design Explorer.

After selecting the element in the Design Explorer or 3D View, click CE to display the
current orientation of the CE:

Input the required direction in the Leave Direction and/or Leave ‘A’ Axis fields. Then press
Enter on the keyboard, the orientation of the CE will be updated with the input(s) in the 3D
View.

Leave Direction Sets the Leave Direction for a piece of HVAC. Valid directions are
E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North)
or -U (Negative Up).

Leave ‘A’ Axis Sets the rotation of the piece of HVAC relative to the Leave
Direction. Valid dimensions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E
(negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

3.1.2 Position
As with the Orientation part of the HVAC window, the Position part of the HVAC window
only effects the currently selected HVAC element. Select an element either in the Design
Explorer or 3D View.

At
The user can use the 3D Viewer to explicitly position the currently selected element At a
new location.
To identify the new position of the CE, choose from one of the following options:

Cursor The user can use the Cursor to pick the new position for the
selected CE. The user must set the view to a Plan view. Using this
method the user will be prompted to pick co-ordinates for East,
North and Up. The East and North co-ordinates are picked first
and together with one click. After clicking Cursor, the user will be
prompted to Enter a 3-d position. The user must click a position
in the selected Plan view. The view will then change, allowing the
user to pick an Up co-ordinate to be used for the elevation of the
CE. To enter the UP co-ordinate the user will be prompted to
Enter a 2nd point to define third coordinate. The user must
click a position in the view.

ID P-Point The user can use the ID P-Point to pick the new position for the
selected CE. The user will be prompted to identify design ppoint
to re-position the origin of the CE at a chosen p-point on another
HVAC element in the 3D graphical view. The user must click the
p-point where the CE is to be re-positioned

ID Element The user can use the ID Element to pick the new position for the
selected CE. The user will be prompted to identify element to
position the origin of the CE at the location of the origin of a
selected element in the 3D graphical view. The user must pick a
different HVAC element.

Next To re-position the origin of the CE in such a way that the P-arrive
is in the correct orientation to join the P-leave of the next piece of
HVAC in the branch

Previous To re-position the origin of the CE in such a way that the P-arrive
is in the correct orientation to join the P-leave of the previous
piece of HVAC in the branch.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

Through
The user can re-position the selected CE along its arrive-leave axis using the options
available from the Through drop-down list.

Cursor The user can use the Cursor to pick the new position for the
selected CE. The user will be prompted to Enter a 3-d position.
The user must click a position in the 3D graphical view to re-
position the CE along its arrive-leave axis to align to the picked
position.

ID P-Point The user can use the ID P-Point to pick the new position for the
selected CE. The user will be prompted to identify design
ppoint. The user must click a p-point on another HVAC element
in the 3D graphical view to re-position the CE along its arrive-
leave axis to align to the selected p-point.

ID Element The user can use the ID Element to pick the new position for the
selected CE. The user will be prompted to identify element. The
user must pick another HVAC element in the 3D graphical view to
re-position the CE along its arrive-leave axis to align to the origin
of the selected HVAC element.

Next To re-position the origin of the CE in such a way that the P-arrive
is in the correct orientation to join the P-leave of the previous
piece of HVAC in the branch.

The user can also move the selected CE to a new position by inputting values into the Move
by or Distance fields.

Move by Moves the selected CE relative to its current position in a given

distance and direction. The user must input values and then press
Return to confirm the new position.

Distance Moves the selected CE along its P-leave axis away from the previous
component leaving the specified Distance between them. The user
must input the required Distance to move the CE and then press
Return to confirm the new position.

Note: Other pieces of HVAC can be moved the same distance and direction, by selecting
each piece in turn.

For more complex positioning and orientating options, refer to HVAC Window.

3.1.3 Connect
The way that an HVAC component connects to the next and previous piece of HVAC in a
sequence can be modified by using the first drop-down list in the Connect part of the HVAC
Window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

Note: Some of the terms used in the following section are described more in detail in later
sections of this guide.

To Previous To connect pieces of HVAC which are not axially

symmetrical (p-leave is always in the opposite direction to p-
arrive - for example straights, tapers).

Leave East/West/North/ To connect a two way piece of HVAC which forces a change
South/Up/Down of direction (for example elbows, bends).

P3 is East/West/North/ To connect a pieces of HVAC which have:

South/Up/Down
Side connection - Threeways, Branch Connectors.
Asymmetrical Two-way - Offsets, Eccentric Tapers
The user must enter the required direction for P3 or Offset

to Next Connect to Next piece of HVAC.

to Branch Tail Connect the piece of HVAC to Branch Tail of the next piece
of HVAC.

To connect the head or tail of the current HVAC branch to another HVAC branch or
component, select from the following drop-down list menu.

In the left hand drop-down list select either the Head or Tail to modify.
Then specify how to identify the point on an existing the HVAC branch or component to
which the head/tail is to be connected.

Tail of ID Branch The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify BRAN (any
point on the branch).

Head of ID Branch The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify BRAN (any
point on the branch).

ID Branch Connector The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify Branch

Connector, refer to Side Branch Branch Connecters
Branch Connectors and HVAC Categories and Available
Types.

ID Threeway Piece The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify Threeway

or Tee Item, refer to HVAC Catalogue and HVAC
Categories and Available Types.

ID Centrifugal Fan The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify

Centrifugal Fan.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

Note: The p-arrive and p-leave points for a centrifugal fan are both on the rectangular
flange face and the P3 is on the circular flange face, regardless of the flow
direction through the fan. Refer to Inline Plant Equipment and HVAC Categories
and Available Types.

ID Air Handling Unit The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify Air
Handling Unit.

Note: The P3 for an air handling unit is the auxiliary flange used, for example, the re
circulation inlet, refer to Inline Plant Equipment and HVAC Categories and
Available Types.

ID Equipment Nozzle The user is prompted in the 3D View to Identify NOZZ,

refer to Equipment Nozzles.

First Member Specifies the Branch Head. Click to identify the first
element in the existing branch.

3.2 Copy ID
An existing piece of HVAC or equipment can be quickly copied and then modified to create
a new piece of HVAC or equipment.

Note: Choose an existing piece of HVAC or equipment with attributes similar to what is
required.

Click Copy ID, the user is prompted in the status bar displayed at the lower left of the main
HVAC Designer Application window to Identify element in the 3D View, the Straight
window.

Note: The window displayed will depend upon what the CE is.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

The user can now type in the new attributes for the new piece of HVAC or equipment and
then click OK to create the new piece of HVAC or equipment.
The user can then specify the Orientation, Position and Connect to another piece of HVAC
of equipment as required.

3.3 Modify CE
The attributes of an existing element, piece of HVAC or equipment can be modified The
attributes that can be modified is dependent upon which item has been selected.
First the user must select the element, piece of HVAC or equipment in the design explorer,
then click Modify CE on the HVAC window.
The create/modify window for the selected item is displayed, with modify as the default. The
user can now modify the attributes as required and then click OK to commit the changes.

Note: The modification option can also be accessed by Modify > HVAC, once the element
is selected in the design explorer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Window

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC System Element

4 HVAC System Element

Referring to the HVAC Hierarchy, the first task that the user should perform using the HVAC
Window is to create an HVAC System Element in the Design database.
Before creating an HVAC System Element the correct Database elements should already be
present in the Design Explorer, i.e. a World, Site and Zone should exist. If this is not the
case, refer to Getting Started with Plant for a detailed explanation of creating these standard
elements. .

Create HVAC System Element

Using the HVAC Window, select HVAC/Branches in the Categories drop-down list and
then select HVAC System Element in the Available Type drop-down list to display the
Create HVAC window:

The Create HVAC window is a dual purpose window, which allows the user to either Create
a new HVAC System element (by default) or Modify the name of an existing HVAC System
element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC System Element

HVAC Name Input a name for the new HVAC system element.

Primary System Allows the user to input the primary system to which it belongs.
The window displays the default option No System plus
descriptions of all the Systems with the purpose of HVAC.

OK Click OK to create the HVAC system element in the Design

Database and close the Create HVAC window. The user will be
returned to the HVAC Window.

Cancel Click Cancel to discard changes and close the Create HVAC
window.

Modify HVAC System Element

To modify an existing HVAC System element first select an existing HVAC System element
in the Design Explorer.

Using the HVAC Window select HVAC/Branches in the Categories drop-down list and then
select HVAC System Element in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Create
HVAC window.
Now change the drop-down list in the top left of the Create HVAC window from Create to
Modify.

The Create HVAC window will be populated with the name of the currently selected HVAC
System element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC System Element

The user can now type in a new HVAC Name for the HVAC element and then click OK to
commit the change.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC System Element

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Main Branch

5 HVAC Main Branch

An HVAC Main Branch is a starting point or branch head to which all other HVAC
Component elements can be added.
Referring to the HVAC Hierarchy, the user must create an HVAC Main Branch below an
existing HVAC System element. For a detailed explanation of how to create an HVAC
System element refer to HVAC System Element.

Select Branches in the Categories drop-down list and then select Main Branch Element
in the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC Main Branch window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Main Branch

The HVAC Main Branch window is a dual purpose window, which allows the user to either
Create a new HVAC Main Branch element (by default) or Modify an existing HVAC Main
Branch element.

Create a HVAC Main Branch

To create a HVAC Main Branch make sure Create is selected in the drop-down list in the
top left of the HVAC Main Branch window.
In the Branch Name box, input the name of the new HVAC Main Branch element.
By default the specification selected in Default Detailing Specification will be used but the
user can select an alternative specification from the Specification drop-down list for
individual HVAC Branches.

Note: All HVAC Components later created below the branch will use the Specification
selected in this drop-down list. To use different specifications within a ductwork run, a
new branch must be created at each point a different specification is used.

The Branch Head Shape specifies the cross-section shape of the HVAC that will be
connected to the branch head.

Note: When later creating an HVAC component to connect to the Branch Head, the shape
of the HVAC must match the shape specified in the Branch Head Shape field.

In the Branch Head Shape drop-down list select from either Rect (Rectangle), Circ (Circle)
or Oval.
After selecting a Branch Head Shape the user can click Picture to display a detailed
drawing of the Branch shape. Refer to Main Branch, the detailed drawing is clearly labelled,
these labels correspond to dimensions that must be input in the following input fields:
The Head Direction specifies the direction that the HVAC will take from the Branch Head:
Valid dimensions for Head Direction are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N
(negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In Duct Width AA (AA is an abbreviation for Arrive A Dimension) enter the width of the
Branch Head.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimensions with Duct depth AB
dimensions.
In Duct depth AB (AB is an abbreviation for Arrive B Dimension) enter the depth of the
Branch Head.

Note: The user will be prompted to enter different dimensions depending upon the shape of
the head selected. The labels for the dimensions can always be visualised by
viewing a detailed drawing for each by clicking Picture.

Select an insulation thickness from the Insulation Thickness list. The available options will
change depending on the Insulation Spec selected. If no insulation is required, select
0mm.
By default only one Insulation Specification is available, if a new insulation specification is
required, refer to the system administrator.
The way that the starting coordinates of the Branch Head are derived can be changed by
selecting from a choice of options in the Head Start drop-down list:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Main Branch

• East0 North0 Up0 - (default) positions the branch head at the co-ordinates 0,0,0
(origin).
• Head of ID Branch - Position the Branch Head at the Head of an existing Branch. The
user will be prompted to click in the 3D View at the position of the existing Branch
Head.
• Tail of ID Branch - Position the Branch Head at the Tail of an existing Branch. The
user will be prompted to click in the 3D View at the position of the existing Branch Tail.
• ID Nozzle - Position the Branch Head at the end of an existing Nozzle element. The
user will be prompted to click in the 3D View at the position of the existing Nozzle.
• ID Ceiling Fitting -
• Cursor - The user will be prompted to click anywhere in the 3D View. Where the user
clicks will be used as the position for the new Branch Head.
• ID Design Point - Position the Branch Head at the position of a P-point of an existing
element. The user will be prompted to click in the 3D View on the P-point of an
element.
• Explicit -
• Unchanged - The position of the Branch Head remains unchanged. The option is only
applicable in Modify mode. If used in Create mode the position defaults to the origin.
Click Defaults to reset all dimensions in the HVAC Main Branch window to out of the box
(initial) dimensions.
Click Picture to display a detailed drawing of the HVAC Main Branch. The labels used in the
detailed drawing match the labels used in the input fields of the HVAC Main Branch
window.
Click OK to create a new HVAC Main Branch element in the Design database and close the
HVAC Main Branch Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard changes and close the HVAC Main Branch window.

Modify HVAC Main Branch

To Modify a existing HVAC Main Branch element first select an existing HVAC Main Branch
element in the Design Explorer.

Using the HVAC Window select HVAC/Branches in the Categories pull-down and select
Main Branch Element in the Available Type drop-down list, to display the HVAC Main
Branch window.
Change the drop-down list in the top left of the HVAC Main Branch window from Create to
Modify.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Main Branch

The HVAC Main Branch window will be populated with the attributes of the currently
selected HVAC Main Branch element.

The user can now type in new attribute dimensions for the HVAC Main Branch element or
reset the attributes to the Defaults and then click OK to commit the change.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Components

6 HVAC Components

HVAC Components are single pieces of HVAC used together to create a HVAC design.
It is usual for the user to build up the HVAC design by adding components sequentially,
starting at the branch head, and positioning and orientating each component as they
proceed. The user can insert a component into an existing sequence by navigating to the
item immediately before the required location and then creating the new component.
There are many different combinations of HVAC component that can be created, because of
this the HVAC application uses a common layout for the windows that are presented to the
user. For the same reason this document only includes a detailed description of how to
create one specific type of HVAC component. The information can be applied to the same
processes that are used to create all other types of HVAC component.

6.1 Create/Modify HVAC Component

All HVAC Component windows are dual purpose windows allowing the user to either Create
a new HVAC Component element (by default) or Modify the attributes of an existing HVAC
Component element.
Referring to the HVAC Hierarchy section, an HVAC Component must reside below an
existing HVAC Branch element. For a detailed explanation of creating an HVAC Branch
refer to HVAC Main Branch or HVAC Side Branch.

Create HVAC Component

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Straight in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Straight window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Components

Note: Make sure the drop-down list in the top left of the HVAC Component window is set
to Create.

The user is required to input the following dimensions for the new HVAC Component.
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Straight.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimensions with Duct depth
AB dimensions.
The user can specify from a selection of industry standard joints, an Arrive Joint (Arrjoint)
for the inlet side of the component and a Leave Joint (Leajoint) for the outlet side of the
component by clicking Choose. The default for the Arrjoint value will be set to detailing
specification, for more information on detailing specification, refer to Default Detailing
Specification).
When the Arrjoint is selected, the user can click Prev. The software will then automatically
select the Leajoint used on the adjacent piece of HVAC to use for the Arrjoint on the new
piece of HVAC. If no adjacent piece of software exists an Error message will be displayed.
To select an Arrjoint or Leajoint, click Choose to open the Choose Joint Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Components

6.1.1 Choose Joint

The Choose Joint window displays a selection of industry joints, the user must choose
from:

The Shape drop-down list by default will be set to the shape of the HVAC component being
created. In this example the Choose Joint window has been opened from the Rectangular
Straight window, so the Shape is set to Rectangular. The Shape can be changed to
Circular or Flat Oval by clicking in the drop-down list and selecting the required Shape.

Note: Changing the value will results in a different list of joints being displayed.

Using the Joint radio buttons the user can choose which end of the HVAC component the
joint will be used for. By default Leave will be selected, but this can be changed to either
Arrive or 3rd Joint.
In the case of a Rectangular Straight only the Leave and Arrive Joint is relevant as
displayed in the diagram below:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Components

The 3rd Joint would be the joint used for a third connecting end of a piece of HVAC such as
a Rectangular Twin Bend Three Way as shown below:

After clicking the Arrive, Leave or 3rd Joint radio button, choose a type of joint from the
available list.
Click OK to close the Choose Joint window and return to the Straight window. The
selected Joint type will be copied into the relevant input field of the Straight window.
For example if the Arrive radio button was selected in the Choose Joint window the
Arrjoint field of the Straight window will be populated with the selection.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Components

After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Width Direction.
In the Width Direction specify the Axis that should be used E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E
(negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to clear all the dimensions currently in the Straight window and set them to
the dimensions when the window was first opened.
Click Fit to orientate the piece of HVAC to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Straight element in the Design database and close the Straight
window. The user will be returned to the HVAC window.
Click Cancel to discard the changes and close the Straight window.

Modify HVAC Component

To Modify an existing HVAC Component element first select an existing HVAC Component
element in the Design Explorer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Components

From the HVAC Window select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then
Straight in the Available Type drop-down list, to display the Straight window.
Change the drop-down list in the top left of the Straight window from Create to Modify.

The Straight window will be populated with the attributes of the currently selected element.

The user can now type in new attribute dimensions for the HVAC Component element and
then click OK to commit the change.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Side Branch

7 Side Branch

A HVAC Side Branch allows the user to create additional branches off the HVAC Main
Branch. To create a Side Branch the user must first add a three-way component to the
HVAC Main Branch. The Side Branch then connects to the three-way component and
automatically sets the Head Direction, Width, Depth, Head shape and Head Start to suit the
selected three-way component.
Referring to the Hierarchy section the user must create HVAC Side Branches below an
existing HVAC System Element.

Using the HVAC Window select HVAC/Branches in the Categories drop-down list and then
select Side Branch (off main) from the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC
Side Branch window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Side Branch

The HVAC Side Branch window is a dual purpose window allowing the user to either
Create a new HVAC Side Branch element (by default) or Modify an existing HVAC Side
Branch Element.

Create a HVAC Side Branch

To create a new HVAC Side Branch make sure Create is selected in the drop-down list in
the top left of the HVAC Side Branch window.
In the Branch Name box, input the name of the HVAC Side Branch element.
Although a specification was selected earlier the user can select a different Specification
for HVAC Side Branches. The default specification will initially be selected but the user can
select an alternative Specification from the drop-down list.
Select an insulation thickness from the Insulation Thickness list. The available options will
change depending on the Insulation Spec selected. If no insulation is required, select 0.
By default only one Insulation Specification is available. If a new insulation specification is
required, refer to the system administrator.
In the Connect Head to drop-down list the user must choose from a list of available HVAC
components which one to connect to the Branch Head. Depending on the selection made,
at least one element of that type must exist in the HVAC model. After making a selection and
clicking OK, the user will be prompted in the status bar displayed at the lower left of the
main HVAC Designer Application window to identify the HVAC component of the selected
type from the 3D View of the HVAC model.

After clicking on the selected HVAC Component the HVAC Side Branch will be created in
the Design database hierarchy and the HVAC Side Branch window will close.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Side Branch

Modify HVAC Side Branch

To modify an existing HVAC Side Branch element, select an existing HVAC Side Branch
element in the Design Explorer.

From the HVAC window select HVAC/Branches in the Categories drop-down list and then
Side Branch (off main) from the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC Side
Branch window.
Change the drop-down list in the top left of the HVAC Side Branch window from Create to
Modify.

The HVAC Side Branch window will now be populated with the attributes of the currently
selected HVAC Side Branch element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Side Branch

The user can now redefine the existing values for the HVAC Side Branch element and then
click OK to commit the change.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

8 HVAC Assembly

A HVAC assembly is a collection of HVAC components that can be copied and placed into
any part of the HVAC network using the Assemblies category from the HVAC window.
To create HVAC assemblies, a separate hierarchy must be created in the design explorer to
provide a storage area for elements which are not part of the design model, such as HVAC
assemblies, in this case called the Application Data World Hierarchy.
All the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with creating or modifying HVAC
assemblies are initiated from the HVAC Assembly Manager window. Click Utilities >
HVAC Assemblies from the main bar menu to display the HVAC Assembly Manager
window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

8.1 Application Dataworld Hierarchy

New or existing HVAC assemblies are stored here as with the Design Hierarchy the
elements must be stored with a World element, followed by an Assembly Area and
Assembly elements. Once the Assembly element is created an element called a Design
Data Set is created below it which stores the assembly rules. For more information on
assembly rules refer to Assembly Rules and zone and system element.

Create Assembly World Element

To create an Assembly World element, from the HVAC Assembly Manager window, click
New World.

The Create Assembly World window is displayed.

The user must now input a Name, Purpose and Description for the Assembly World
element.
Create Assembly Area Element
To create an Assembly Area element, from the HVAC Assembly Manager window, click
New Area.

The Create Assembly Area window is displayed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

The user must now input a Name, Purpose and Description for the Assembly Area
element.
Create Assembly Element
To create an Assembly element, from the HVAC Assembly Manager window, click New
Assembly.

The Create Assembly window is displayed.

The user must now input a Name, Purpose and Description for the Assembly element.
The Assembly World, Assembly Area and Assembly element attributes can be modified
or deleted by right clicking in each of the fields. The user can select Modify or Delete from
the pop-up menu. Selecting Modify displays either a Modify Assembly World, Modify
Assembly Area or a Modify Assembly window allowing the user to change any of the
fields. Selecting Delete displays a Confirm window prompting the user to confirm the
deletion.
The elements are created and displayed in the Design Explorer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

and HVAC Assembly Manager window:

Having completed the basic Application Data World hierarchy the user must add an
assembly. In the 3D graphical view, press Ctrl key and click to highlight the elements which
are to make up the assembly.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

When all the elements have been selected click Copy Design.

The selected elements will be copied and a Message window is displayed confirming the
copy is complete.

The assembly is copied into the Design explorer and HVAC Assembly Manager window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

The HVAC Assembly has now been created.

The user must make sure that the required assembly is identified current element, click CE.
Select the Display/Name/Description checkbox to display the assembly elements by
description, otherwise the assembly elements are displayed by name.
If more than one branch is selected the user is prompted to identify the main branch.

Note: Once an assembly has been created and populated it cannot be added to.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

8.1.1 Assembly Rules

The Assembly Rules are a very powerful tool allowing a system administrator to create,
position and orientate assemblies. By using macros (Function), launch forms which require
input (Form) and position the assembly by setting the primary and secondary origins
(Primary Origin).

For more information refer to the system administrator.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Assembly

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Tiles/Grid

9 Tiles/Grid

The Tiles/Grid utility is used to create a reference grid to aid in the construction of the
design, a reference grid based on a horizontal layout is used as an aid to position inlet/outlet
HVAC grilles which are represented as ceiling tiles.

9.1 Grid Setting Out Point (SOP)

As described in Hierarchy, elements must be created or placed in a strict order:
A datum can only be owned by a Zone element in the design hierarchy and a SOP can only
be owned by a Zone or a Structure (Stru) element.
The SOP and Datum are the points from which all reference grid lines are calculated.
The user must first create a SOP.
The HVAC application incorporates design aids which help the user to position ceiling tiles
representing inlet/outlet grilles etc. based on a horizontal grid layout.
Navigate to the zone under which the reference grid and tile layout are to be created and
then use the facility in the following three stages (in the order shown):
1. Specify a setting-out point (S.O.P.) to represent the datum from which grid line positions
can be calculated. To do this, select Utilities > HVAC Tiles/Layout > Setting Out Point.
2. Create horizontal lines at specified intervals, referenced from the setting-out point,
extending over a given rectangular area. To do this, select Utilities > HVAC Tiles/Grid
Layout > Grid from S.O.P.
3. Add tiles at specified positions in the plane of the. To do this, select Utilities > HVAC
Tiles/Layout > Apply Tiles in Grid.
The user must create a SOP, the reference grid will radiate out from the SOP.
The setting out point (datum) can only be created below a Zone element, the datum is
created as a structure element followed by a DISH element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Tiles/Grid

Note: The setting out point can only be created using the 2D cursor in the orthogonal view
(plan view), change the view to the plan view, from the main menu click View > Plan
> North, South, East or West.

The setting out point (datum) from which all grid line positions are calculated, and must be
created first.
To create a setting out point, from the main menu, click Utilities > HVAC Tiles/Grid Layout
> 1. Setting Out Point to display the HVAC Grid Setting Out Point window:

The HVAC Grid Setting Out Point window names the datum and specifies the elevation of
the datum from the floor plane.

Note: The datum or setting out point can be placed at a random point and then moved to its
exact position as required.

S.O.P. Name Input the name of the Setting Out Point (SOP).

Setting Out Point Height Input the elevation of the datum from the floor plane.

OK Click OK to close the window and to identify the point at

which the datum or setting out point is to be created.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the window and discard inputs.

The user is prompted to Use the 2D cursor to position a datum in the 3D graphical view,
the datum or setting out point is created and can be seen in the 3D graphical view and in the
design explorer as a DISH element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Tiles/Grid

As it is often difficult to position the S.O.P. at the centre of a plane, use the Explicit Position
window to position the S.O.P. From the main menu, click Position > Explicitly (AT).

9.2 Layout Grid from SOP

The layout of the grid must be defined through the current SOP datum, with the grid lines
spaced out from the SOP in both directions.
Use the HVAC. Layout Grid from SOP window to layout the grid, from the main menu, click
Utilities > HVAC Tiles/Grid Layout > Grid from S.O.P.

The user is required to input the grid spacing separations

Note: The default is 600.

East/West Grid Spacings Input the width dimension of the grid spacing separation.

North/South Grid Spacings Input the length dimension of the grid spacing
separation.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Tiles/Grid

OK Click OK to close the window and create the layout grid.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the window and discard inputs.

The user is prompted to Position the SouthWest Grid Extent in the 3D graphical view,
then Position the NorthEast Grid Extent. A grid is now shown in the 3D graphical view
and in the design explorer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Tiles/Grid

If the identified area is not rectangular, an overall grid is created using abutting rectangles
based on setting-out points. Apply tiles to the grid to act as a reference position, refer to
Apply Tiles in Grid.

9.3 Apply Tiles in Grid

Once the grid layout has been created, the dimensions of the tiles to be placed in the layout
grid need to be defined.
Use the HVAC Apply Tiles in Grid window to define tile dimensions. From the main menu,
click Utilities > HVAC Tiles/Grid Layout > Apply Tiles in Grid.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Tiles/Grid

The user is required to input the tile dimensions to be positioned in the grid.

East/West Tile Width Input the width dimension of the tile in the east/west
orientation (default is 600).

North/South Tile Width Input the width dimension of the tile in the North/South
orientation (default is 600).

OK Click OK to close the window and create the tiles.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the window and complete the task.

Note: The tiles do not have to be the same size as the grid squares, but usually are in
practice.

The user is prompted to Position the Tile Centre Point (2D Cursor), click to place the tiles
in the layout grid, there is no need to be precise as the tile edges snap to the grid lines within
half of a tile dimension in each direction.
Once all the tiles have been placed, press Esc to exit this utility.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Autofill With Straights

10 Autofill With Straights

When creating the HVAC branch the user may have concentrated on specifying
components with specific functions, such as bends, side connection points, silencers and
dampers. The gaps between created components are left undefined and are automatically
filled with implied ducting to complete the design model in the 3D graphical view.
To fill the gaps and make sure that the design can be prefabricated, it is necessary to
specify the required fixed lengths of ductwork straights between the components and to
enable the production of a full material take-off list.
These standard and non-standard straights required to fill each gap are then created in the
design database automatically and displayed in the hierarchy.

10.1 Show Gaps

Each gap between the pieces of HVAC and/or equipment in the selected branch is identified
and the optimum combination of standard and non-standard ducting straights required to fill
each gap is calculated.
The gaps shown in the 3D graphical view are dependent upon if a branch, a piece of HVAC
or a piece of equipment is selected in the Design Explorer, identified as the CE. If a branch
is selected, all gaps in the branch will be shown. If a single piece of HVAC or equipment is
selected, only the gap between the selected piece and the next piece is shown.
To identify each gap and calculate the required fixed length of ducting straight to fill it, click
Utilities > Autofill with Straights > Show Gaps from the main menu to display the
Highlight Implied Ductwork. (HVAC) window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Autofill With Straights

After selecting the required pieces of HVAC in the Design Explorer, click Apply. The
Highlight Implied Ductwork. (HVAC) window displays the:
• Location, the preceding component.
• Length.
• Calculated fixed lengths of standard and non-standard ducting straights to fill the gaps.
All corresponding lengths of implied ducting are highlighted red in the 3D Graphical View.
Clicking Unhighlight removes all the red highlighting from the 3D Graphical View.

Note: The red highlight is also removed from the 3D graphical view, once the Highlight
Implied Ductwork. (HVAC) window is dismissed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Autofill With Straights

10.2 Fill Gaps

Once the gaps which are currently filled with implied ducting have been identified, the
implied ducting can be replaced automatically with ducting straights.
To identify each gap and calculate the required fixed length of ducting straight to fill it, click
Utilities > Autofill with Straights > Fill Gaps from the main menu to display the Autofill
with Straights. (HVAC) window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Autofill With Straights

After selecting the required pieces of HVAC in the Design Explorer, click Apply. The Autofill
with Straights. (HVAC) window displays all the identified gaps but also the specified
straight lengths are created automatically to replace the implied ducting.
All corresponding lengths of implied ducting are highlighted red in the 3D Graphical View.
Clicking Unhighlight removes all the red highlighting from the 3D Graphical View.
The red highlight is also removed from the 3D graphical view, once the Highlight Implied
Ductwork. (HVAC) window is dismissed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

11 Utilities

The PDMSDesign HVAC Designer Application provides the user with design aids and tools
(utilities) which enable the user to: for example: use and construct drawing aids, perform
calculations, customise database and produce data to aid manufacture. To view the
Utilities, click Utilities, from the main menu bar. The Utilities menu is displayed.
• HVAC Designer - is a system administrative utility, for further information refer to the
system administrator or refer to the HVAC Administrator Guide.
• Specification Generator - is a system administrative utility, for further information refer
to the system administrator or refer to the HVAC Administrator Guide.
• Automatic Itemising
• Surface Area and Weight
• Centre of Gravity
• HVAC Penetration

11.1 Automatic Itemising

The Automatic Itemising utility automatically allocates sequential item numbers to all pieces
of HVAC and Plant equipment.

Note: Use Automatic Itemising to show where the pieces of HVAC and/or equipment fit in
the selected branch (hierarchy structure).

From the main menu bar, click Utilities > Automatic Itemising, to display the HVAC
Itemising window.

The HVAC Itemising window defines the naming prefix and start number.
Click to identify the branch selected in the design explorer as the CE.
The Naming Prefix is in the format PREFIXnumber - e.g. /HITEM1.
All extra Plant and inline plant equipment already have naming prefixes and therefore
remain unchanged.
Decimalised version for other items.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

Input the Naming Prefix

Input the number for the starting point of the sequential numbering, click Apply, the HVAC
Command Output window displays the itemised list:

Click Apply to sequentially number another element identified as the CE and open the
HVAC Command Output window and display the itemised list, or click Dismiss to close the
HVAC Itemising window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

11.2 Surface Area and Weight

The surface area is the exposed area of an HVAC branch, a piece of HVAC or a Inline/Extra
line equipment. The surface area and weight of each item is calculated each time an item is
created or modified, based upon the information held in the HVAC Catalogue.
The Surface Area & Weight utility calculates and displays the surface area and weights of
branches, individual pieces of HVAC or equipment:
From the main menu bar, click Utilities > Surface Area & Weight, to display the Surface
Area & Weight. (HVAC) window:

CE Click to identify the selection in the design explorer as the CE.

Apply Click to calculate the surface area and weight of the current
element and open the HVAC Command Output window and
display the calculated results.

Dismiss Closes the Surface Area & Weight. (HVAC) window.

The HVAC Command Output window displays all the calculated results.

All of the results carried out previously can still be seen in the HVAC Command Output
window.

11.3 Centre of Gravity

The centre of gravity (C of G) of a rigid body does not always coincide with the geometric
centre and the position of the C of G of a rigid body is fixed in relation to the object.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

The C of G utility calculates the collective C of G and total weight of selected branches,
individual pieces of HVAC or equipment which make up a group, for more information on
groups, refer to Create a Group.
The calculation is carried out on a group element created in the database hierarchy, in order
to create a group element, a group world element must be created first. For more
information, refer to Getting Started with Plant..

11.3.1 Create a Group

The Group world element must be the level above a group element in the database
hierarchy.
Once the Group World element is created, the user is returned to the Groups window and
the element is inserted into the hierarchy, the group sets element must now be created.
Once the Group element is created, the user is returned to the Groups window and the
element is inserted into the hierarchy, the group sets element must now be populated.
Make sure the required element is selected in the design explorer (identified as the CE).
Right click the CE to display the drop down menu, click Add Current Elements to add the
elements which make up the CE to the Group.
Once the group has been created and populated, click Control then Close, the Group
window is closed. The user must now select the group element for which the calculation of
centre of gravity is required.
Click to identify the group element (GPSET) as the CE in the Design Explorer, from the
main menu bar, click Utilities > Centre of Gravity, to display the Centre of Gravity.
(HVAC) window:

The Centre of Gravity. (HVAC) window identifies the group element in the design explorer
as the CE and calculates the total weight and C of G of the CE.

CE Click to identify the selected element in the design explorer as

the CE.

Unhighlight Click to remove the red highlight from the CE.

Apply Click to calculate the total weight and centre of gravity of the
CE and display the results in the HVAC Command window.
The CE is highlighted in red in the 3D graphical view.

Dismiss Closes the Centre of Gravity. (HVAC) window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

Note: The calculated C of G is displayed in the 3D graphical view.

11.4 HVAC Penetration

A penetration must be created to define a hole at any point where one or more runs of
HVAC pass through a panel, wall or structural element. For more information, refer to
Design Common Functionality User Guide.

11.5 Data Consistency

The Data Consistency utility is used to carry out customised checks on the design model to
make sure that it complies with specific company or project requirements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

From the main menu bar, select Utilities > Data Consistency, the Data Consistency
Check window is displayed, this window acts as a hub for the data consistency check.

The element the data consistency check is to be performed on must be selected first, in the
Check list:

Note: Not all of the elements in the check list are applicable to the HVAC module.

The parameters of the data consistency check must now be set, click HVAC, to display the
HVAC Consistency Check Options window:

11.5.1 HVAC Consistency Check Options

The parameters of the selected element is displayed in the HVAC Consistency Check
Options window, the user can amend the parameters as required.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

If required, amend the tube tolerances to suit specific company or project requirements,
click Tube Range, the Tube Tolerance Check Options window is displayed, with the
default attributes shown:

If the default parameters are not suitable, the user can then amend the available parameters
as required and click Reset to change the parameters.
Click OK to confirm the changes or accept the default parameters. The user is returned to
the HVAC Consistency Check Options window.
Click Cancel to close the Tube Tolerance Check Options window. The user is returned to
the HVAC Consistency Check Options window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

If the default parameters are not suitable, the user can then amend the available parameters
as required and click Reset to change the parameters.
From the HVAC Consistency Check Options window:
Click OK to confirm the changes, the user is returned to the Data Consistency Check
window.
Click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the HVAC Consistency Check Options
window. The user is returned to the Data Consistency Check window.
How the results of the data consistency check (output) is displayed must now be specified,
click the Screen or File radio button, then Apply:
The Screen option displays the output in the Data Consistency Check window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

The File option requires a filename, the location of where the file will be stored and if the file
will be a new file, if it will overwrite an existing file or add on to the end. In the Data
Consistency Check window:

In the Directory box, enter where the file is to be stored, then in the Filename box enter the
filename. From the drop-down list, specify the type of file - New file, Overwrite an existing
file or add on to an existing file.
If required, select another element from the Check list to perform a Data Consistency Check
on or click Dismiss to close the window.

11.5.2 Import HVAC Data

The Import HVAC Data function imports tags, descriptions and other attributes from a CSV
or XLS format file. Select Utilities > Import HVAC Data to display the HVAC Designer
Data Import window.
Refer to Import Data in the Design Common Functionality User Guide for further
information.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Utilities

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

12 HVAC Spooling

The HVAC Spooling utility allows the HVAC design to be split in spools. Splitting the HVAC
design into spools allows each spool to be fabricated as a single manageable entity.
Click Utilities > HVAC Spooling from the main menu bar to display the HVAC Spool
Manager.

The HVAC Spool Manager window is displayed, click Set HVAC to display the RefNo of the
CE is displayed in the top left hand corner. (For more information on the RefNo attribute,
refer to Getting Started with Plant.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

The user must now name the HVAC Spool List, this can be done in two ways:

HVAC Spool List Name

The user can input a name for the HVAC Spool List and then click Generate. The HVAC
Spool List is generated and displayed in the HVAC Spool Manager window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

Auto Name
Select the Auto Name check box to display the HVAC Spool List Name with the Name
(applies auto naming rules, refer to the system administrator), then click Generate link.

Note: Once the Auto Name checkbox is selected, a name cannot be input into the HVAC
Spool List Name.

The HVAC Spool List is generated and displayed in the HVAC Spool Manager window, the
spools are named in the following format:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

All the tasks that a user can carry out that are associated with the re-creation, modification
or verification of HVAC Spools are initiated from the HVAC Spools Manager window, which
acts as a task hub.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

The entire spools list can be deleted or regenerated:

Delete Spools Click to delete all of the generated HVAC spools.

Regenerate Click to regenerate and display the HVAC spools.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

12.0.1 Verification
Verification identifies any element or elements in the spool(s) which do not satisfy any of the
criteria for a valid spool.

Note: The spool criteria is set by the System Administrator.

Verify HVAC Click to verify all of the spools.

Verify HVAC Spools Click to verify individual or multiple spools.

If the spool:
• meets the criteria, Successful is input into the Verification status column.
• fails to meet the criteria, Failed is input into the Verification status column and the
details of failure are displayed in the Failure Details column.
When Verify HVAC or Verify HVAC Spools is clicked a Results Summary pane appears
on the HVAC Spool Manager window displaying the results of the verification.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

12.0.2 Modification
The spool list can be modified by the addition or removal of elements that make up the
spools.

Note: Only HVAC elements next to each other in the run of HVAC can be selected.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

Add Spool Elements

From the HVAC Spool Manager window, click the spool which the HVAC components are
to be added to.

Note: The select spool is highlighted red in the 3D graphical view.

After clicking Add Spool Elements the user will be prompted to Pick HVAC components
to add to the selected spool or <escape> to complete. The spool element to be added
must now be selected. In the 3D graphical view, click the spool element(s) to be added to
the selected spool. When all the spool elements have been selected press Esc on the
keyboard.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

The spool list must now be regenerated and verified:

Remove Spool Elements

From the HVAC Spool Manager window, select the spool which the HVAC components are
to be removed from.

Note: The selected spool is highlighted red in the 3D graphical view.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

After clicking Remove Spool Elements the user will be prompted to Pick HVAC
components to remove from selected spool or <escape> to complete. The spool
element to be removed must now be selected. In the 3D graphical view, click the spool
element(s) to be removed from the selected spool. When all the spool elements have been
selected press Esc on the keyboard.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

The spool list must now be regenerated and verified.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Spooling

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Query Data Settings

13 Query Data Settings

In addition to the Query commands common to all the DESIGN applications, HVAC users
can, via the HVAC Command Output window display the following additional information,
Item Details, Position, Orientation and the Gap to Next.

13.1 Item Details

Any piece of HVAC can be identified as the CE allowing design data to be viewed. The user
has five options under the Query > Item Details menu, Brief Description, Item Number,
Detailing Spec, Insulation Depth and Taper Side Angles.

Note: When viewing Item Details, make sure the required CE is selected.

13.1.1 Brief Description

The user can display a Brief Description of the CE as allocated by the HVAC Catalogue by
clicking Query > Item Details > Brief Description from the main menu bar. The HVAC
Command Output window is displayed summarising the following types of data, type,
shape, duct size, length, angle and joints.

13.1.2 Item Number

The user can display the item number of the CE as allocated by the Automatic Itemising
utility by clicking Query > Item Details > Item Number, from the main menu bar. The HVAC
Command Output window is displayed showing the Item Number.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Query Data Settings

13.1.3 Detailing Spec

The user can display the detailing specification of the CE by clicking Query > Item Details >
Detailing Spec, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is
displayed showing the detailing specification allocated to the CE with the prefix Dscode. For
more information on detailing specification, refer to Default Detailing Specification:

13.1.4 Insulation Depth

The user can display the depth of the insulation for the branch identified as the CE by
clicking Query > Item Details > Insulation Depth. The HVAC Command Output window
is displayed showing the details of the insulation depth.

13.1.5 Taper Side Angles

The user can display the slope angles of the four sides of a rectangular taper component by
clicking Query > Item Details > Taper Side Angles, from the main menu bar. The HVAC
Command Output window is displayed showing the details of the slope angles.

Note: The Taper Side Angles option is only applicable when a tapered piece of HVAC is
identified as the CE.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Query Data Settings

13.2 Position
The Query > Position options show the positions of the p-points for the CE or branch. The
user can also access this information from Query > General menu but if it’s only the
position of the p-point that is required Query > Position is a quicker option.

Note: When viewing the position of the p-points, make sure the required CE is selected.

The p-points available is dependent upon the type of HVAC component identified as the CE.
If the CE does not have the required p-point, an error message is displayed.

13.2.1 Origin
The user can query the position of the Origin (P0) of the CE by clicking Query > Position>
Origin, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is displayed
showing the position of the Origin of the CE.

13.2.2 Position PA
The user can query the position of the PA (P1 or P-arrive) of the CE by clicking Query >
Position > Position PA, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is
displayed showing the position of PA.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Query Data Settings

13.2.3 Position PL
The user can query the position of the PL (P2 or P-leave) of the CE by clicking Query >
Position > Position PL, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is
displayed showing the position of PL.

13.2.4 Position P3
The position of the P3 (branch connector) is only available on a threeway connector. The
user can query the position of the P3 of the CE by clicking Query > Position > Position P3,
from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is displayed showing the
position of P3.

13.2.5 Position PH
The user can query the position of the PH (Branch Head) by clicking Query > Position >
Position PH, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is displayed
showing the position of PH.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Query Data Settings

13.2.6 Position PT
The user can query the position of the PT (Branch Tail) by clicking Query > Position >
Position PT, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window will be
displayed showing the position of PT.

13.3 Orientation
The user can query the p-leave direction of the CE by clicking Query > Orientation from the
main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window is displayed showing the p-leave
direction.

13.4 Gap to Next

The user can query the distance between the CE and the next component by clicking Query
> Gap to next, from the main menu bar. The HVAC Command Output window will be
displayed showing the distance between the CE and the adjacent component.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Query Data Settings

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Create HVAC Sketches

14 Create HVAC Sketches

HVAC spool data from the Design module, can be used to create HVAC sketches
automatically in Automatic Drawing Production application from the DRAFT module.
The sketches include a dimensioned, scaled drawings of an HVAC spool with details of the
spool and assembly data.
The layout of the sketch and associated sheets can be chosen from a database and the
location of where the sketches can be stored can be defined in the system hierarchy. To
customise the layout, refer to the System Administrator.
From the main menu bar, select Design > Modules > DRAFT > Macro Files to launch the
DRAFT module. When DRAFT has loaded select DRAFT > Auto Drawing Production to
open the Automatic Drawing Production application.

Note: If the user has previously entered the Automatic Drawing Production applicable,
entering the Draft module again will automatically load the Automatic Drawing
Production application.

The Design Explorer must be displayed to select the required spool, if the Design
Explorer is not displayed, select Display > Explorers > Design Explorer from the main
menu bar.
The HVAC Spool data to create a sketch must now be selected. To display the HVAC
Sketches window, click Create > HVAC Sketches from the main menu bar.
The HVAC Sketches window contains all the options to search for HVAC spool data. The
user can use any or all of the options.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Create HVAC Sketches

The user must enter the name of the design element into the Design Element to search
under field by selecting the element HVAC in the Design Explorer and clicking CE on the

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Create HVAC Sketches

HVAC sketches window. The selected CE must be a valid element or an error message will
be displayed.

After the Design Element to search under field has been populated, the search criteria for
the HVAC Spool data can be customised to search for All or part of the spool name,
Production Status and the Sketch Status. The user can populate any of the three fields or
all of the three fields.

All or part of the spool The user can enter either the complete spool name or
name part of the spool name.

Production Status The user can select from the pull-down, one of three
options.
Any - Matches all spools, both validated and not
validated.
Valid - Matches only spools valid for production.
Not Valid - Matches only spools not valid for production

Sketch Status The user can select from the pull-down, one of three
options.
Any - Matches all spools, both with and without HVAC
sketches.
Created - Matches only spools with HVAC sketches.
Not Created - Matches only spools without HVAC
sketches.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Create HVAC Sketches

After clicking Search the results are displayed in the Search Results window.

The Search Results are displayed in the following format:

The Name column displays the name of the HVAC Spool, the Valid column shows if the
spool has been validated or not by displaying true for validated spool and false for not
validated spool. The Sketch column shows if a sketch has been created or not by displaying
the name of the resulting file for created and FALSE for Not Created. If the sketch has been
created, the date the sketch is created is displayed in the Drawn column.
A pop-up menu is accessed by right clicking in the Search Results pane with the four
available options:

Select All Selects all the spools in the Search Results list.

Clear Selection Deselects all the spools in the Search Results list.

Print Sketch Opens a print dialog which allows the user to print selected
spool sketches.

Note: Only valid if a spool sketch has been created.

Delete Sketch Deletes all selected spool sketches.

Note: Only valid if a spool sketch has been created.

To create the HVAC sketches, click in the Search Results to identify which HVAC Spools are
to be created.
The user must define the template to be used for the sketch, a storage area for the created
sketch and a log filename by using the Sketch Creation Options on the HVAC Sketches
window:
The Sketch Template must be an existing DRWG or DRTMPL element that can used for
the sketch.

Note: If the selected element is not an existing DRWG element then an error message is
displayed.

Select the required DRWG element in the Draft Explorer, then click CE. The name of the
element is displayed in the Sketch Template field.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Create HVAC Sketches

To choose the Registry for the storage of the created HVAC sketches, select the registry
element from the Draft Explorer, then click CE.

Note: If the selected element is not an existing REGI element then an error message is
displayed.

The name of the registry element is displayed in the Create Sketches in Registry field.
The Log file contains a record of the sketch creation, displayed as text and is overwritten if
it already exists. The Log File field displays file location. To change the file location, click
Browse and navigate to the required location to save the Log File.
When all of the Sketch Creation Options have been defined the sketch can be created by
clicking Create Sketches. The results displayed in Search Results are refreshed to show
the spool sketch has been created and the date it was drawn.

Click Display to view the spool sketch and add it to a working list of sheets for display. Only
one sheet can be displayed at a time. To view other sheets in the working list click the up
and down arrows next to Display.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Create HVAC Sketches

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 14:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

15 Split HVAC

When the HVAC route is well defined and stable, Spilt HVAC allows the user to split the
HVAC system at either logical breaks based on topographical features or at specific points
along the HVAC route.
All of the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with the splitting of HVAC
branches are initiated from a central Split HVAC window which acts as a task hub.
To display the Split HVAC window, click Modify > Split HVAC from the main menu bar to
display the Spilt HVAC window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

15.1 Branches to Spilt

The user must create a list of HVAC Branches to split. The top part of the Split HVAC
window comprises a tabular area listing the Branches to Split, directly below is a drop-
down list which allows the user to choose a method to select a branch to split and to the
right of this an Add button.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

To Add entries to the Branches to Split table the used must first choose from the drop-
down list the method to select a Branch. Once a Branch is selected the user can click Add
to include it in the table.
The options available in the drop-down are:

CE Adds to the list the HVAC branch element if the CE is a

HVAC branch, or adds the owning branch if the CE is a
HVAC branch member, or adds all the HVAC branches if the
CE is a HVAC main element.

List Adds all the HVAC branches from the active list.

Note: If no list is defined an error message is displayed.

Graphical Pick After selecting Graphical Pick and clicking Add the user is
prompted to Pick an HVAC component in the 3D View.
The owner branch is added to the list.

Window Selection Allows the user to add HVAC branches from the elements
selected using Window selection in the 3D View. Only HVAC
branches in the selection are added to the list.

The CE, List, Graphical Pick and Window Selection are also available by right clicking in
the list and selecting from the pop-up menu. Additional options available from the pop-up
menu are:

Remove Selected Removes selected elements from the list.

Remove All Removes all the elements from the list.

Highlight Selection Toggle menu used to specify if the selected branch in the list
is highlighted or not.

Display Existing Splits Displays existing splits.

Once the CE is identified in the Design Explorer, click Add. The branch identified as the
CE is entered into the Branches to be Split table of the Split HVAC window and the
selected branch is highlighted in the 3D View.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

15.1.1 Plane Definition

The user must now define the plane at which to create and position the split markers:
In the Plane Size box, enter the size of the plane.
The method of defining the plane must now be selected using one of the following options,
from the drop-down list:
Select DB Planner Element, the user can select a database element which can be
translated in to a plane.
Select Element, the user will be prompted to identify element to define the plane in the 3D
View.
Select Ppoints, the user will be prompted to identify design ppoint to define the plane at a
chosen P-point in the 3D View, P-Points are described in the Getting Started with Plant and
Basic Features of the Catalogue.
Select Pline, the user will be prompted to Pick a P-line that can be translated into a
plane to define the plane in the 3D View.
Select Reference Grid, if a reference grid exists, the user can select a reference grid to
define a plane.
Select Explicitly, the plane is displayed in the 3D View, the user can define the plane
explicitly with the Define Plane window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

The user will be prompted to pick A HVAC element to position the plane in the 3D
graphical view or the user can enter parameters into the Define Plane window.

Options
The user can choose to display the name (label), axes and whether the plane is filled:
To display the label for the plane, select the Label checkbox.
To display the axes for the plane, select the Axes checkbox.
To display the plane, as filled, select the Filled checkbox.

Position & Orientation

The user can position and orientate the plane explicitly by changing the co-ordinates and
axes of the plane.

Note: E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative

Up).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

If required, select one or all of the Lock check boxes to fix the current co-ordinate along the
E, N or U axis.
If required, the axes to which all co-ordinates are interpreted with respect to must now be
set.
If required, in the wrt box, input the name of the element to which all co-ordinates are
interpreted with respect to.
Click OK to close the Define Plane window and confirm the changes.
Click Cancel to close the Define Plane window and discard any inputs.

15.1.2 Modify Plane

If required, once the plane is created it can be modified, the user can select from the Modify
Plane drop-down list. The options available in the drop-down are:
Definition, the Modify Plane window is displayed or the user is prompted to Modify Plane
(Snap) Snap: in the 3D View. The user can now enter new plane parameters for the plane
and the click OK to commit the changes.
Position, the user is prompted Re-position Aid-pick aid element in the 3D View. The
Plane is displayed in the 3D View:

The user can fill in the plane, select the Fill checkbox.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

15.2 Split Marker

The user can choose if the branch is to be split by a marker or assembly, click to select
Marker or Assembly. If a marker is to be used, click Create Marker, the split marker is
created at the defined plane and is displayed in the 3D View.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

The split marker is also displayed in the Design Explorer:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

To split the selected branch at the marker, click Apply. The branch is split at the marker and
the spilt branch is created in the Design Explorer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

15.2.1 Reposition Marker

If required the user can reposition the marker, this option is only applicable to the marker,
The user must first select the required spilt marker in the Design Explorer. The user can
then choose how the marker is to be repositioned from the Reposition Marker drop-down
list. The options available in the drop-down are:

Explicitly
Explicitly At, the Explicit Position window is displayed and the selected marker is
highlighted in green and its origin is also labelled, the user can change the position of the
marker from its current position to an explicitly defined position. Or the user can identify the
new position of the marker in the 3D View.

Relatively By
Relatively By, the Position By window is displayed and the selected marker is highlighted
in green and its origin is also labelled, the user can change the position of the marker to a

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

specified distance in a specified direction, relative to its current position. Or the user can
identify the new position of the marker in the 3D View.

15.3 Split Assembly

If a assembly is to be used as a marker, click Assembly, then Select Assembly.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

The Select HVAC Assembly window is displayed:

Select the assembly from the list of available assemblies, then Select as the Splitting
Assembly. The selected assembly is displayed in the Split HVAC window, close the Select
HVAC Assembly window. The name of the selected assembly is displayed in the Split
HVAC window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

Click Apply, the branch is spilt at the defined plane and the HVAC assembly is inserted at
the intersection of the plane.
Once the branches have been split, the elements which make them up must be moved to a
location in the design hierarchy. The user can choose from three locations, select:
Current HVAC - The elements will be stored in the current HVAC hierarchy.
New HVAC - The elements will be stored in a new HVAC hierarchy, the user must create a
new HVAC hierarchy.
Existing HVAC - The elements will be stored in an existing HVAC hierarchy, the user must
enter the name of an existing HVAC hierarchy.
If required, the user can flip head tube, click Flip Head Tube, then the user is prompted to
Pick branch tubes to flip.

15.4 Merge Branches

It may be necessary to merge the branches of split HVAC, click Modify > Merge Branches
from the main menu.
The user is prompted in the 3D View to First pick a connected branch to merge, once the
user selects a connected branch, the name of the branch is displayed at the top of the 3D
View. Then the user is prompted to Secondly pick the branch to merge to, once the user
selects a connected branch, the name of the branch is displayed at the top of the 3D View.
The confirm window is displayed, prompting the user Do you really want to merge the two
branches.
Click Yes to merge the selected branches or click No to close the window and discard
inputs.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Split HVAC

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 15:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

16 Menu Map

The menu map below can be used by the user to navigate the Categories and Available
Types drop-down lists to create HVAC System, HVAC Main Branch and Side Branch and
HVAC Component Elements.

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
HVAC/Branches HVAC System Launches the HVAC
Element System Element
window.

Main Branch Element Launches the Main

Branch Element
window.

Side Branch (off main) Launches the Side

Branch (off main)
window.

Rectangular Straight Launches the Straight

window.

Taper Launches the Taper

window.

Cranked Taper Launches the Cranked

Taper window.
Square Bend Launches the Square
Bend window.
Radiused Bend Launches the Radiused
Bend window.
Mitred Elbow Launches the Mitred
Elbow window.
Crank Offset Launches the Crank
Offset window.
Mitred Offset Launches the Mitred
Offset window.
Radiused Offset Launches the Radiused
Offset window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Radiused Threeway Launches the Radiused
Threeway window.
Twin Bend Threeway Launches the TwinBend
Threeway window.
Breeches Threeway Launches the Breeches
Threeway window.
Square Threeway Launches the Square
Threeway window.
Cap End Launches the Cap End
window.

Mesh End Launches the Mesh End

window.

Material Connection Launches the Material

Connection window.
Weather Skirt Launches the Weather
Skirt window.
AUTOMATIC
FILLING:-

Two Bend Setfill Launches the Two Bend

Setfill window.
SUB-COMPONENTS:-

Stiffening Launches the Stiffening

window.

Access Panel Launches the Access

Panel window.
Test Point Launches the Test
Holes window.
‘A’ plane Splitter Displays a Confirm
message window. If Yes
is confirmed it launches
the ‘A’ Plane Splitter
window.

‘B’ plane Splitter Displays a Confirm

message window. If Yes
is confirmed it launches
the ‘B’ Plane Splitter
window.

Radiused Splitter

Deflectrol Launches the Deflectrol

window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Internal Damper Launches the Internal
Damper window.
Gasket Launches the Gasket
window.

Turning Vanes Launches the Turning

Vanes window.
Circular Straight Launches the Circular
Straight window.
Male Coupling Launches the Male
Coupling window.
Taper Launches the Circular
Taper window.
Mitred Offset Launches the Mitred
Offset window.
Mitred Elbow Launches the Circular
Elbow window.
Radiused Bend Launches the Radiused
Bend window.
3 Segment Bend Launches the 3 Segment
Bend window.
4 Segment Bend Launches the 4 Segment
Bend window.
5 Segment Bend Launches the 5 Segment
Bend window.
Radiused Threeway Launches the Radiused
Threeway window.
Breeches Launches the Circular
Breeches window.
Angled Breeches Launches the Angled
Breeches window.
Side Branch Tee Launches the Side
Branch Tee window.
Cap End Launches the Cap End
window.

Mesh End Launches the Mesh End

window.

Material Connection Launches the Material

Connection window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Flexible Tube Launches the Flexible
Tube window.
Flexible Bend Launches the Flexible
Bend window.
Roof Cowl Launches the Roof Cowl
window.

AUTOMATIC
FILLING:-

Two Bend Setfill Launches the Two Bend

Setfill window.
Two Bend Flexfill Launches the Two Bend
Flexfill window.
SUB-COMPONENTS:-

Stiffening Launches the Stiffening

window.

Access Panel Launches the Access

Panel window.
Saddle Launches the Saddle
window.

Test Point Launches the Test

Point window.
Internal Damper Launches the Internal
Damper window.
Gasket Launches the Gasket
window.

Flat Oval Straight Launches the Flat Oval

Straight window.
Male Coupling Launches the Male
Coupling window.
Taper Launches the Flat Oval
Taper window.
‘A’ plane Offset Launches the ‘A’ Plane
Offset window.
‘B’ plane Offset Launches the ‘B’ Plane
Offset window.
‘A’ plane Mitred Elbow Launches the ‘A’ Plane
Mitred Elbow window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
‘B’ plane Mitred Elbow Launches the ‘B’ Plane
Mitred Elbow window.
‘A’ plane 3 Segment Launches the‘A’ Plane 3
Bend Segment window.
‘B’ plane 3 Segment Launches the ‘B’ Plane 3
Bend Segment window.
‘A’ plane 4 Segment Launches the ‘A’ Plane 4
Bend Segment Bend window.
‘B’ plane 4 Segment Launches the ‘B’ Plane 4
Bend Segment Bend window.
‘A’ plane 5 Segment Launches the ‘A’ Plane 5
Bend Segment A Bend
window.

‘B’ plane 5 Segment Launches the ‘B’ Plane 5

Bend Segment Bend window.
Cap End Launches the Flat Oval
Cap End window.
SUB-COMPONENTS:-

Stiffening Launches the Stiffening

window.

Access Panel Launches the Access

Panel window.
Saddle Launches the Saddle
window.

Gasket Launches the Flat Oval

Gasket window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Transformations Square to Round Launches the Square to
Round window.
Square to Flat Oval Launches the Square to
Flat Oval window.
Round to Flat Oval Launches the Round to
FlatOval window.
Oval ‘A’ to Oval ‘B’ Launches the Oval ‘A’ to
Oval ‘B’ window.
Spigot Box Launches the Spigot Box
window.

Linear Plenum Launches the Linear

Plenum window.
Circ>Rect Spigot Plate Launches the Circ>Rect
Spigot Plate window.
Oval>Rect Spigot Launches the Oval>Rect
Plate Spigot Plate window.
Branch RECTANGULAR:-
Connectors

Boot r Launches the

Rectangular Boot r
window.

Square r Launches the

Rectangular Square r
window.

Fish r Launches the

Rectangular Fish r
window.

Angled r Launches the

Rectangular Angled r
window.

Tapered r Launches the

Rectangular Tapered
r window.
CIRCULAR:-

Boot c Launches the Circular

Boot c window.
Square c Launches the Circular
Square c window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Fish c Launches the Circular
Fish c window.
Angled c Launches the Circular
Angled c window.
Conical c Launches the Circular
Conical c window.
Square-Round c Launches the Circular
Square-Round c
window.

Mitred c Launches the Circular

Mitred c window.
FLAT OVAL:-

‘A’ Boot f Launches the Flat Oval

‘A’ Boot f window.
‘B’ Boot f Launches the Flat Oval
‘B’ Boot f window.
‘A’ Square f Launches the Flat Oval
‘A’ Square f window.
‘B’ Square f Launches the Flat Oval
‘B’ Square f window.
‘A’ Fish f Launches the Flat Oval
‘A’ Fish f window.
‘B’ Fish f Launches the Flat Oval
‘B’ Fish f window.
‘A’ Angled f Launches the Flat Oval
‘A’ Angled f window.
‘B’ Angled f Launches the Flat Oval
‘B’ Angled f window.
Inline Plant RECTANGULAR:-
Equipment

Fire Damper r Launches the

Rectangular Fire
Damper window.
Flanged Fire Damper r Launches the
Rectangular Flanged
Fire Damper window.
Control Damper r Launches the
Rectangular Control
Damper window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Motorised Damper r Launches the
Rectangular Motorised
Damper r window.
Heater Battery r Launches the
Rectangular Heater
Battery r window.
Cooler Battery r Launches the
Rectangular Cooler
Battery r window.
Silencer r Launches the
Rectangular Silencer r
window.
Attenuated Bend r Launches the
Rectangular Attenuated
Bend r window.
General Plant Item r Launches the
Rectangular General
Plant Item r window.
Grille off brco r Window can only be
launched from a Branch
Connector.
Launches the
Rectangular Grille in
line r window.
Grille in line r Launches the
Rectangular Grille in
line r window.
Air Handling Unit r Launches the
Rectangular Centrifugal
Fan r window.
Centrifugal Fan r Launches the Circular
Fire Damper c window.
CIRCULAR:-

Fire Damper c Launches the Circular

Flanged Fire Damper c
window.

Flanged Fire Damper c Launches the Circular

Control Damper c
window.

Control Damper c Launches the Circular

Axial Flow Fan c
window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Axial Flow Fan c Launches the Circular
Axial Flow Fan c
window.

Silencer c Launches the Circular

Silencer c window.
General Plant Item c Launches the Circular
General Plant Item c
window.

Grille off brco c Launches the Grille Off

Brco c window.
Grille in line c Launches the Circular
Grille in line c window.
FLAT OVAL:-

Fire Damper f Launches the Flat Oval

Fire Damper f window.
Extra Inline Flat Low Vel’ Terminal Launches the Flat Low
Equipment Vel’ Terminal window.
Corner Mount LV Launches the Corner
Terminal Mount LV Terminal
window.

Semi-C Air Launches the Semi-C Air

Displacement Displacement window.
Circ Air Displacement Launches the Circ Air
Unit Displacement Unit
window.

Rect Air Displacement Launches the Rect Air

Unit Displacement Unit
window.

Rect Disp Unit - Rect Launches the Rect Disp

Conn Unit - Rect Conn
window.

Connection Box Circ- Launches the

Circ Connection Box Circ-
Circ window.
Connection Box Circ- Launches the
Rect Connection Box Circ-
Rect window.
Circ Diffuser - Circ Launches the Circ
Inlet Diffuser - Circ Inlet
window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Menu Map

Categories Available Types Window can only be Window can only be

launched from an launched from an
HVAC Branch or HVAC Component
HVAC Component
Rect Diffuser - Circ Launches the Rect
Inlet Diffuser - Circ Inlet
window.

Rect Grille - Rect Inlet Launches the Rect Grille

- Rect Inlet window.
Circular Air Intake Launches the Circular
Hood Air Intake Hood window.
Circular Air Extract Launches the Circular
Hood Air Intake Hood window.
PDMS Equipment Rectangular Nozzle Window can only be
Nozzles launched from an
Equipment element:
Launches the
Rectangular Nozzle
window.

Circular Nozzle Window can only be

launched from an
Equipment element:
Launches the Circular
Nozzle window.
Flat Oval Nozzle Window can only be
launched from an
Equipment element:
Launches the Flat Oval
Nozzle window.
MODIFY Existing Window can only be
Nozzle launched from an HVAC
Equipment Nozzle:
Launches the Modify
Existing Nozzle window.
User Defined Launches the User
Fittings Defined Fittings
window.

Assemblies Launches the

Assemblies window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 16:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Work Area

17 Work Area

Most of the work area is common for all design disciplines, but some areas with respect to
the HVAC application can be customised to suit a user.

17.1 Customise
The defaults, format and settings of the HVAC work area can be customised by clicking
Settings > Ductwork Defaults, from the main menu bar to display the HVAC Defaults
window.

The HVAC Defaults window is closed by clicking Control > Close.

17.1.1 Defaults
The default settings used to create the design model are taken from the current defaults file,
the name of which is displayed in the HVAC Defaults window, Current Defaults file =.
These default settings makes sure the user is in compliance with company standards and a
high level of design consistency is maintained throughout the project.
Created items are generated using these defaults settings, any default setting can be
overwritten. All dimensions (metric or imperial) must be compatible with the session units in
force.

Change Defaults
The current defaults file can be changed to use other default settings to comply with
company standards and national/international standards.
To change the defaults, click Control > Load From from the HVAC Defaults window, to
display the Choose an Existing Defaults File window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Work Area

The user can now browse and choose an appropriate defaults file.

Note: CADMETRIC.DEF and CADCIMPERIAL.DEF default files are supplied as standard.

17.1.2 Style
Some windows of the HVAC work area can be customised, from the HVAC Defaults window,
click Style > Style options. The HVAC Form Style window is displayed:

Note: None of these style options can be seen until tasks are being performed, refer to
HVAC Window and HVAC Components.

All the available style options to customise the HVAC work area are available from the
HVAC Form Style window:

Show Local Views

Select the Show Local Views checkbox to continuously display a 3D graphical view of the
current component next to the Create/Modify window.
Deselect the Show Local Views checkbox to remove the 3D graphical view.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Work Area

Local Views Shade

The user can change the appearance of the component in the Local View from a shaded
view to a wire line view by selecting or deselecting the Local Views Shade checkbox.
Selecting the checkbox will display a shaded view and deselecting will display a wire line
view.

Note: The Show Local Views checkbox must be selected for either option to display.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Work Area

OK/Cancel Forms
The OK/Cancel Forms checkbox allows the user to change the OK and Cancel buttons to
Apply and Dismiss buttons on the Create/Modify windows.
To display the OK and Cancel buttons, check the OK/Cancel Forms checkbox. Selecting
this option will close the Create/Modify window when OK is clicked allowing the user to only
create or modify a single component.
To display the Apply and Dismiss buttons, deselect the OK/Cancel Forms checkbox.
Selecting this option will not close the Create/Modify window when Apply is clicked
allowing the user to create or modify multiple instances of the same component.

Show Pixmaps
The user can choose to display a pictorial representation of the Available Types of
components available when a selection is made in the Categories field on the HVAC
Window.
To display a pictorial representation select the Show Pixmaps checkbox. For more
information on the which representations are available refer to Component Palettes.
To remove the pictorial representations deselect the Show Pixmaps checkbox.

Show Forms
The user can choose whether or not to display the Create/Modify windows by selecting or
deselecting the Show Forms checkbox.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Work Area

Selecting the Show Forms checkbox displays the Create/Modify windows automatically
with the addition of a new component allowing the user to change the default detailing
specifications.
Deselecting the Show Forms checkbox prevents the Create/Modify windows automatically
displaying with the addition of a new component. Using this option allows the user to
connect components immediately using the default detailing specifications. The user can
modify any added component by selecting the component and clicking Modify CE on the
HVAC Window.

17.2 HVAC Window

The HVAC Window can be used in either a Full or Brief format by selecting Style > Use Full
Form or Style > Use Brief Form from the HVAC Defaults window. Both the formats
perform the same functions except the Full format has an additional option, Plane
Positioning.
For details on the functions common to both forms refer to HVAC Window.

Plane Positioning
The additional positioning aid to position elements defines a reference plane for use as a
construction aid.
The plane is called the construction plane, the plane is defined in terms of its position (a
point through which it passes) and its direction (the direction of a line normal to the plane).

The user can use this option to define the construction plane’s position and direction:

Plane Direction Define the direction of the normal to the plane:

Input a direction.

Cursor Specify the method of identification of a point through which the

plane is constructed (p-arrive):
The user can use the cursor to pick a new position in the 3D
View. Before doing so the User should reset the view to a Plan
view. The first prompt Enter a 3-d position is used for the east
and north coordinates. The view will then flip allowing the user to
pick a point to be used for the elevation of the element (Enter a
2nd point to define third coordinate).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Work Area

ID P-Point Specify the method of identification of a point through which the

plane is constructed (p-arrive):
The user will be prompted to identify design ppoint to position
the origin of the CE at a chosen P-point in the 3D graphical view,
P-Points are described in the Getting Started with Plant and
Basic Features of the Catalogue.

ID Element Specify the method of identification of a point through which the

plane is constructed (p-arrive):
The user will be prompted to identify element to position the
origin of the CE at the location of the origin of a selected element
in the 3D graphical view.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 17:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Component Palettes

18 Component Palettes

HVAC Component palettes display a pictorial representation of the components available

when the user selects a Category from the HVAC Window if the Show Pixmaps checkbox
has been checked ON in the HVAC Defaults window. Refer to Show Pixmaps for more
information.
To view the corresponding Create/Modify component window, click the required pixmap on
the palette.

Note: Not all the options in the Categories drop-down list have palettes available.

The available palettes are:

18.1 Rectangular Ductwork

To display the HVAC Rectangular Ductwork palette, click Rectangular from the
Categories drop-down list on the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Component Palettes

18.2 Circular Ductwork

To display the HVAC Circular Ductwork palette, click Circular from the Categories drop-
down list on the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Component Palettes

18.3 Flat Oval Ductwork

To display the HVAC Flat Oval Ductwork palette, click Flat Oval from the Categories drop-
down list on the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Component Palettes

18.4 Shape Transformation Items

To display the HVAC Shape Transformation Items palette, click Transformations from the
Categories drop-down list on the HVAC Window.

18.5 Branch Connectors

To display the HVAC Branch Connectors palette, click Branch Connectors from the
Categories drop-down list on the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Component Palettes

18.6 Inline Plant Equipment

To display the HVAC Inline Plant Equipment palette, click Inline Plant Equipment from
the Categories drop-down list on the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Component Palettes

18.7 Extra Equipment

To display the HVAC Extra Equipment palette, click Extra Inline Equipment from the
Categories drop-down list on the HVAC Window.

18.8 Nozzle Items

To display the HVAC Nozzle Items palette, click Equipment Nozzles from the Categories
drop-down list on the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 18:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

19 Components

In this section, all of the HVAC components available for selection in the catalogue database
are described. If there is a requirement for a component which is not available, refer to
system administrator. The information can be applied to the same processes that are used
to create all other types of HVAC component, for a more detailed description of creating a
HVAC component, refer to HVAC Components.

19.1 Branches
The branches option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the specific HVAC
hierarchical elements which are available from the Available Types drop-down list.

19.1.1 HVAC System Element

A HVAC System Element is a top level element in the design database under which other
elements are created, for a more detailed description, refer to HVAC System Element.

19.1.2 Main Branch Element

A HVAC Main Branch is a starting point or branch head to which all other HVAC Component
elements can be added, for a more detailed description, refer to HVAC Main Branch.

19.1.3 Side Branch (off main)

A HVAC Side Branch allows the user to create additional branches off the Main Branch, for
a more detailed description, refer to Side Branch.

19.2 Rectangular
The Rectangular option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the rectangular
components for selection in the catalogue database.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

19.2.1 Straight
The task of creating a HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Straight in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Straight window:

For a more detailed description, refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component.

19.2.2 Taper
The task of creating a HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Taper in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Taper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Length
• A Offset
• B Offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Taper.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or to exchange Duct width LA dimension with Duct depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the A Offset or B Offset relative to the Point of
Origin Valid directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative
North) or -U (Negative Up).In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Taper window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Taper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the previous
piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Taper component and close the Taper Window. The user will be
returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Taper window.

19.2.3 Cranked Taper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Cranked Taper in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Cranked Taper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct width LB
• Length
• A Offset
• B Offset
• A Back Extension
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Cranked Taper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or to exchange Duct Width LA dimension with Duct Width LA dimension with
Duct depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Aoff and Boff Direction.
In the Aoff and Boff Direction enter the direction for the Aoff and Boff relative to the Point
of Origin. Valid directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative
North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Cranked Taper window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Cranked Taper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Cranked Taper component and close the Cranked Taper Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Cranked Taper window.

19.2.4 Square Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Square Bend in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Square Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
• Inside Radius
• Back Radius
• Arri Back Fillet
• PL to Back Fillet

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Arri Thrt Fillet

• PL to Thrt Fillet
• Airturn Vanes
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Square Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Airturns Vanes default
is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Square Bend was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Square Bend to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Square Bend component and close the Square Bend Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Square Bend window.

19.2.5 Radiused Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Radiused Bend in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Radiused Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct width AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Radius Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populate with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to rest all the fields back to when the Radiused Bend window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Radiused Bend to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Radisued Bend component and close the Radiused Bend Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Radiused Bend window.

19.2.6 Mitred Elbow

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Mitred Elbow in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Mitred Elbow window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Angle
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
• Inside Radius
• Back Radius
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Mitred Elbow.

Note: The fields will be pre-populate with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Mitred Elbow window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the piece of HVAC to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Mitred Elbow component and close the Mitred Elbow Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Mitred Elbow window.

19.2.7 Crank Offset

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Cranked Offset in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Cranked Offset window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Crank Offset.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
dimension for are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Cranked Offset window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Cranked Offset to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Cranked Offset component and close the Cranked Offset Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Cranked Offset window.

19.2.8 Mitred Offset

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Mitred Offset in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Mitred Offset window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Length
• A offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Mitred Offset.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to HVAC Components for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Offset Direction.
In the Offset Direction enter the direction for the Offset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Mitred Offset window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Mitred Offset to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Mitred Offset component and close the Mitred Offset window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Mitred Offset window.

19.2.9 Radiused Offset

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Radiused Offset in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Radiused Offset window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Length
• A offset
• Arri Inside Rad
• Arri Back Rad
• Leave Inside Rad
• Leave Back Rad
• Arrive Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Radius Offset.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint)
(Leajoint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Offset Direction.
In the Offset Direction enter the direction for the Offset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Radiused Offset window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Radiused Offset to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Radiused Offset component and close the Radiused Offset
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Radisued Offset window.

19.2.10 Radiused Threeway

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Radiused Threeway in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Radiused Threeway window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Second width
• Second depth
• Angle

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Second Angle
• Inside Radius
• Second Radius
• Branch A offset
• Branch B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Second Aext
• Second Lext
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Radius Threeway.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or to exchange Second width dimension with Second depth dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).Using the Flip Arrive/
Leave drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the direction of arrive and leave of
the of the piece of HVAC 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Radiused Threeway window was
opened.
Click OK to create the Radiused Threeway component and close the Radiused Threeway
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Radiused Threeway window.

19.2.11 TwinBend Threeway

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then TwinBend Threeway in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the TwinBend Threeway window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Second width
• Second depth
• Angle
• Second Angle
• Inside Radius
• Second Radius
• Branch B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Second Aext
• Second Lext
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Twin Bend Threeway.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or to exchange Second width dimension with Second depth dimension.
From the Flip Arrive/Leave drop-down list, select Yes or No to flip the direction of arrive
and leave of the of the HVAC component.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the TwinBend Threeway window was
opened.
Click OK to create the TwinBend Threeway component and close the TwinBend
Threeway Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the TwinBend Threeway window.

19.2.12 Breeches Threeway

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Breeches Threeway in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Breeches Threeway window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Branch width
• Overall length
• A offset
• B offset
• Cutback Depth
• Gap
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Branch Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Breeches Threeway.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required direction.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or to exchange Duct width LA dimension with Duct depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) or
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, Leajoint and Brajoint the user must
enter the Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Breeches Threeway window was
opened.
Click OK to create the Breeches Threeway component and close the Breeches Threeway
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Breeches Threeway window.

19.2.13 Square Threeway

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Square Threeway in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Square Threeway window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input all the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Second width
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
• Inside Radius
• Second A Throat
• Second L Throat
• Second Radius

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Square Threeway.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension. or to exchange Second width dimension with Second depth dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) or
Brajoint (3rd Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, Leajoint or Brajoint the user must
enter the Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).In the Connect
list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Square Threeway window was
opened.
Click OK to create the Square Threeway component and close the Square Threeway
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Square Threeway window.

19.2.14 Cap End

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Cap End in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Cap End window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Graphical length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Cap End.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to HVAC Components for a
detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint the user must enter the Width
Direction.
In the Width Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Cap End window was opened.
Click OK to create the Cap End component and close the Cap End Window. The user will
be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Cap End window.

19.2.15 Mesh End

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Mesh End in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Rectangular Mesh End window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Mesh X Spacings
• Mesh Y Spacings
• Mesh Wire Gauge
• Graphical length

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Mesh End.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Width Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Rectangular Mesh End window was
opened.
Click OK to create the Rectangular Mesh End component and close the Rectangular
Mesh End Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Rectangular Mesh End window.

19.2.16 Material Connection

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Material Connection in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Material Connection window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:29 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Overall length
• Mat’l Thickness
• Arrive Slipover
• Leave Slipover
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Material Connection.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Use
this type of joint for the inlet side of the component. Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Width Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:30 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In the Width Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Material Connection window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Material Connection to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Material Connection component and close the Material
Connection Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Material Connection window.

19.2.17 Weather Skirt

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Weather Skirt in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Weather Skirt window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:31 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Skirt width AA
• Skirt depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Dist from Leave
• Height
• A offset
• B offset
• First Extension
• Last Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Weather Skirt.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:32 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Weather Skirt window was opened.
Click Fit to Next to orientate the Weather Skirt to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Weather Skirt component and close the Weather Skirt Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Weather Skirt window.

19.2.18 Two Bend Setfill

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
From the HVAC Window select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then
Two Bend Setfill in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Two Bend Setfill
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:33 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Inside Radius
• 1st Arrive Extension
• 1st Leave Extension
• 2nd Arrive Extension
• 2nd Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display a
detailed drawing for Two Bend Setfill.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:34 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Extension for the 1st and 2nd Bends default is auto but can be changed by the
user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint) for
both the 1st and 2nd Bends. Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Two Bend Setfill window.
Click OK to create the Two Bend Setfill component and close the Two Bend Setfill
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Two Bend Setfill window.

19.2.19 Stiffening
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Stiffening in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Stiffening window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:35 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Stiffener width
• Stiffener depth
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Spec Requirement
• Number of Sides
• Face from Leave

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:36 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• A offset
• B offset
• Angle
• Stiffener Face
• Other Web
• Web Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Stiffener.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

The application has automatically calculated the required number of stiffeners to support the
CE (using the current detailing specification and other parameters). The number is
displayed in the Spec Requirement box.
The number of sides of the CE is automatically input into the Number of Sides box, in this
case as the CE is a rectangular straight the number of sides is input as 4.

Note: Stiffening flanges are configured to suit each different component.

Click OK the Spec Requirement to confirm the automatically generated number of

stiffeners is compatible with the detailing specification.
If this is not required, click Q Spec Req, to change the automatically generated number of
stiffeners.
After selecting the Spec Requirement the user must enter the Aoff Direction.
In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ords 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Stiffening window was opened.
Click OK to create the Stiffening Flanges and close the Stiffening window. The user will
be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Stiffening window.

19.2.20 Access Panel

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Access Panel in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Access Panel window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:37 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• The user can select a standard stock access panel, using Select Size drop-down list,
the Access Panel (W) and Access Panel (H) fields are populated with the standard
sizes. If a standard stock size is not required, input the following dimensions:
• Access Panel (W)
• Access Panel (H)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:38 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Face over Duct
• Dist from Leave
• Adjustments Offs
• Lateral Offset
• Angle of Slope
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
• Panel Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Access Panel.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Access Panel (W) dimension with Access
Panel (H) dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN width LB
dimension.
In Panel Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user to the required joint.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Access Panel window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Access Panel to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Access Panel component and close the Access Panel Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Access Panel window.

19.2.21 Test Holes

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
From the HVAC Window select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then
Test Holes in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Test Holes window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:39 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• No of Test Holes
• Test Hole - Dia
• Test Hole Height
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Dist from Leave
• Lateral Offset

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:40 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The No of Test Holes
default is as defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user.

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Test Holes.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN width LB
dimension.
In Holes Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Test Holes window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Test Holes to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Test Holes component and close the Test Holes Window. The user
will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Test Holes window.

19.2.22 ‘A’ Plane Splitter

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘A’Plane Splitter in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the ‘A’Plane Splitter window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:41 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:42 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Leave Extension
• Splitter Foffset
• Splitter Loffset
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘A’ Plane Splitter.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Access Panel (W) dimension with Access
Panel (H) dimension or to exchange Duct width LA dimension with Duct width LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Aoff
Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the ‘A’ Plane Splitter window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the ‘A’ Plane Splitter to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the ‘A’ Plane Splitter component and close the ‘A’ Plane Splitter
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the ‘A’ Plane Splitter window.

19.2.23 ‘B’ Plane Splitter

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘B’Plane Splitter in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the ‘B’Plane Splitter window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:43 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:44 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Leave Extension
• Splitter Foffset
• Splitter Loffset
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘B’ Plane Splitter.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Access Panel (W) dimension with Access
Panel (H) dimension or to exchange Duct width LA dimension with Duct width LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Aoff
Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the ‘B’ Plane Splitter window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the ‘B’ Plane Splitter to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the ‘B’ Plane Splitter component and close the ‘B’ Plane Splitter
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the ‘B’ Plane Splitter window.

19.2.24 Radiused Splitter

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Radiused Splitter in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Radiused Splitter window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:45 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input dimensions for the new HVAC Component:
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Bend Inside Radius
• Bend A Extension
• Bend L Extension
• Splitter Radius
• Splitter Aext
• Splitter Lext
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Radius Splitter.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated dimensions. These dimensions are governed by the
detailed defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:46 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

• Click Connect (default when create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
Click Unchanged (default when modify is selected) - positions the component at the co-
ordinates 0.00.
Click Defaults to clear all the dimension currently in the window and set them to the
dimension when the window was first opened.
Click Fit to orientate the piece of HVAC to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Rectangular Radiused Splitter element in the Design database and
close the Radiused Splitter Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to close the Radiused Splitter window and discard any dimension input in the
fields.

19.2.25 Deflectrol
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Deflector in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Deflector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:47 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Deflectrol widt
• Deflectrol dept
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• First Side Offs
• Leave Side Offs
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Deflectrol.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated dimensions. These dimensions are governed by the
detailed defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:48 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension to exchange Duct width LA dimension with Duct depth LB dimension.
In Defl Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes for are E (East), N (North), U (Up),
-E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
Click Unchanged (default when modify is selected) - positions the component at the co-
ordinates 0.00.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Deflectrol window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Deflectrol component to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Deflector component and close the Deflector Window. The user will
be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the filed changes and close the Deflector window.

19.2.26 Internal Damper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Internal Damper in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Internal Damper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:49 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Dist from Leave
Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Internal Damper.
Click Transpose width/dept to exchange the Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth
AB dimension.
In Handle Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up),
-E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:50 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Internal Damper window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Internal Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Internal Damper component and close the Internal Damper
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Internal Damper window.

19.2.27 Gasket
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Gasket in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Gasket window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Thickness
• Flange Face

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:51 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Gasket.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
In Width Direction enter the specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East),
N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).In the
Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Gasket window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Gasket to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the previous
piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Gasket component and close the Gasket Window. The user will be
returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Gasket window.

19.2.28 Turning Vanes

The task of creating HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Rectangular in the Categories drop-down list and then Turning Vanes in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Turning Vanes window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:52 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Leave Throat
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Turning Vanes.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Using the Direction radio buttons the user can choose which direction the air turning vanes
are be directed relative to the Leave Direction.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Turning Vanes window was opened.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:53 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Fit to orientate the Turning Vanes to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Turning Vanes component and close the Turning Vanes Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Turning Vanes window.

19.3 Circular
The circular option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the circular
components for selection in the catalogue database.

19.3.1 Circular Straight

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Circular Straight in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Circular Straight window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Straight.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:54 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Straight window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Straight component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Straight component and close the Circular Straight
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Circular Straight window.

19.3.2 Male Coupling

The task of creating a HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Male Coupling in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Male Coupling window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Length
• Male Collar (A)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:55 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Male Collar (L)

To visualise how the dimensions acute to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Male Coupling.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Male Coupling window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Male Coupling component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Male Coupling component and close the Male Coupling Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Male Coupling window.

19.3.3 Circular Taper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Taper in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Circular Taper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:56 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter ‘A’
• Duct Diameter ‘L’
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Taper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:57 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Aoff
Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Taper window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Taper component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Taper component and close the Circular Taper Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Circular Taper window.

19.3.4 Mitred Offset

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Mitred Offset in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Mitred Offset window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:58 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Length
• Offset
• Arrive cl Throat
• Leave cl Throat
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Mitred Offset.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Offset
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:59 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Offset Direction enter the direction of the Offset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Mitred Offset window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Mitred Offset component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Mitred Offset component and close the Mitred Offset Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Mitred Offset window.

19.3.5 Circular Elbow

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Circular Elbow in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Circular Elbow window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:60 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Angle
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Mitred Elbow.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:61 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Elbow window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Elbow component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Elbow component and close the Circular Elbow Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Circular Elbow window.

19.3.6 Radiused Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Radiused Bend in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Radiused Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:62 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Radius Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:63 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Radiused Bend window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Radiused Bend component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Radiused Bend component and close the Radiused Bend Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Radiused Bend window.

19.3.7 3 Segment Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then 3 Segment Bend in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the 3 Segment Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:64 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for 3 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:65 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 3 Segment Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 3 Segment Bend component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 3 Segment Bend component and close the 3 Segment Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 3 Segment Bend window.

19.3.8 4 Segment Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then 4 Segment Bend in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the 4 Segment Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:66 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for 4 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:67 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 4 Segment Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 4 Segment Bend component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 4 Segment Bend component and close the 4 Segment Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 4 Segment Bend window.

19.3.9 5 Segment Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then 5 Segment Bend in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the 5 Segment Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:68 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for 5 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:69 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 5 Segment Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 5 Segment Bend component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 5 Segment Bend component and close the 5 Segment Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 5 Segment Bend window.

19.3.10 Radiused Threeway

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Radiused Threeway in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Radiused Threeway window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:70 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Second Diameter
• Angle
• Second Angle
• Inside Radius
• Second Radius

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:71 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Second Aext
• Second Lext
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
• Male Collar (B)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Radius Threeway.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
Using the Flip Arrive/Leave drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the
direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Radiused Threeway window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Radiused Threeway to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Radiused Threeway component and close the Radiused Threeway
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Radiused Threeway window.

19.3.11 Circular Breeches

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Circular Breeches in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Circular Breeches window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:72 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter ‘A’
• Duct Diameter ‘L’
• Duct Diameter ‘B’
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:73 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Branch Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
• Male (Collar B)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Breeches.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive, Leave and
Branch Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required
dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
Using the Flip Arrive/Leave drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the
direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Radiused Threeway window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Radiused Threeway to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Radiused Threeway component and close the Radiused Threeway
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Radiused Threeway window.

19.3.12 Angled Breeches

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Angled Breeches in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Angled Breeches window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:74 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter ‘A’
• Duct Diameter ‘L’
• Duct diameter ‘B’
• Length
• Branch Length
• Angle

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:75 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Branch Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
• Male Collar (B)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Angled Breeches.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive, Leave and
Branch Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required
dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
dimension for are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
Using the Flip Arrive/Leave drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the
direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Angled Breeches window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Angled Breeches to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Angled Breeches component and close the Angled Breeches
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Angled Breeches window.

19.3.13 Side Branch Tee

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Side Branch Tee in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Circular Tee Piece window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:76 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The Circular Tee Piece window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by the
user using the following two methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Main Sizes and Stock Branch Size drop-down lists, click the required dimensions for the
HVAC component.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:77 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In the Brco Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Main Sizes
drop-down list, select Special. The Stock Branch Sizes drop down list automatically
changes to Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Duct Diameter ‘A’
• Duct Diameter ‘L’
• Brco Diameter
• Length
• Brco Length
• cl from Leave
• Angles of Sides
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Brco Extension
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Tee Piece.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave Joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). The default is Spec but can be changed by the user. Refer to
Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Brco Direction.
In the Brco Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Radiused Threeway window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Tee Piece to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Tee Piece component and close the Circular Tee Piece
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:78 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Circular Tee Piece window.

19.3.14 Cap End

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Cap End in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Circular Cap End window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Graphical length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Cap End.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Cap End window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Cap End to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:79 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click OK to create the Circular Cap End component and close the Circular Cap End
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Circular Cap End window

19.3.15 Mesh End

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then in the Available Type drop-down
list to display the Circular Mesh End window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Mesh X Spacings
• Mesh Y Spacings
• Mesh Wire Gauge
• Graphical length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Mesh End.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:80 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Mesh End window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Mesh End to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Mesh End component and close the Circular Mesh End
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Circular Mesh End window.

19.3.16 Material Connection

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Material Connection in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Material Connection window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Overall length

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:81 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Mat’l Thickness
• Arrive Slipover
• Leave Slipover
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Material Connection.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Material Connection window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Material Connection to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Material Connection component and close the Material
Connection Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Material Connection window.

19.3.17 Flexible Tube

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Flexible Tube in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Flexible Tube window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:82 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flexible Tube.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

In the Aoff Direction enter the direction of the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:83 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Flexible Tube window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Flexible Tube to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Flexible Tube component and close the Flexible Tube Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Flexible Tube window.

19.3.18 Flexible Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Flexible Bend in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Flexible Bend window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:84 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flexible Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

In the Leave Direction specify the axes that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Flexible Bend window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Flexible Bend to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Flexible Bend component and close the Flexible Bend Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Flexible Bend window.

19.3.19 Roof Cowl

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Roof Cowl in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Roof Cowl window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:85 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Cowl Diameter
• Cowl Height
• Duct to Cone
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Weather Cowl.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Roof Cowl window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Roof Cowl to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Roof Cowl component and close the Roof Cowl Window. The user
will be returned to the HVAC Window

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:86 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Roof Cowl window.

19.3.20 Two Bend Setfill

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Two Bend Setfill in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Two Bend Setfill window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Inside Radius
• 1st Bend Arrive Extension
• 1st Bend Leave Extension
• 2nd Bend Arrive Extension
• 2nd Bend Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Two Bend Setfill.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:87 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension for the 1st and 2nd Bends default is auto but can be changed by the
user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint for 1st and 2nd Bend). Refer to
Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Two Bend Setfill window was
opened.
Click OK to create the Two Bend Setfill component and close the Two Bend Setfill
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Two Bend Setfill window.

19.3.21 Two Bend Flexfill

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Two Bend Flexfill in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Two Bend Flexfill window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension (1st Bend)
• Leave Extension (2nd Bend)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:88 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Two Bend Flexfill.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Two Bend Flexfill window was
opened.
Click OK to create the Two Bend Flexfill component and close the Two Bend Flexfill
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Two Bend Flexfill window.

19.3.22 Stiffening
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Stiffening in the Available Type
drop-down list.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:89 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Stiffener Diam
• Duct Diameter
• Spec Requirement
• Face from Leave
• A offset
• B offset
• Angle
• Stiffener Face
• Other Web
• Web Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Stiffener.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:90 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

The application has automatically calculated the required number of stiffeners to support the
CE (using the current detailing specification and other parameters). The number is
displayed in the Spec Requirement box.
The number of sides of the CE is automatically input into the Number of Sides box, in this
case as the CE is a rectangular straight the number of sides is input as 4.

Note: Stiffening flanges are configured to suit each different component.

Click OK the Spec Requirement to confirm the automatically generated number of

stiffeners is compatible with the detailing specification.
If this is not required, click Q Spec Req, to change the automatically generated number of
stiffeners.
After selecting the Spec Requirement the user must enter the Aoff Direction.
In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ords 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Stiffening window was opened.
Click OK to create the Stiffening Flanges and close the Stiffening window. The user will
be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Stiffening window.

19.3.23 Access Panel

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Access Panel in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Access Panel window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:91 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• The user can select a standard stock access panel, using Select Size drop-down list,
the Access Panel (W) and Access Panel (H) fields are populated with the standard
sizes. If a standard stock size is not required, input the following dimensions:
• Access Panel (W)
• Access Panel (H)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:92 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Face over Duct
• Dist from Leave
• Adjustments Offs
• Lateral Offset
• Angle of Slope
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
• Panel Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Access Panel.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Access Panel (W) dimension with Access
Panel (H) dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN width LB
dimension.
In Panel Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user to the required joint.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Access Panel window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Access Panel to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Access Panel component and close the Access Panel Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Access Panel window.

19.3.24 Saddle
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Saddle in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Saddle window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:93 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Saddle o/all (W)
• Saddle o/all (H)
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Saddle Depth
• Dist from Leave
• Lateral Offset
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
• Saddle Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Saddle.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:94 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

The user can also select a standard stock access panel, using Select Size drop-down list,
the Saddle o/all (W) and Saddle o/all (H) fields are populated with the standard sizes.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Saddle o/all (W) dimension with Saddle o/all
(H) dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN width LB dimension.
In Saddle Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up),
-E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).In the Connect list, select
Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Saddle window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Saddle to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Saddle component and close the Saddle Window. The user will be
returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Saddle window.

19.3.25 Test Point

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Test Point in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Test Holes window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:95 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• No of test Holes
• Test Hole - Dia
• Test Hole Height
• MAIN Diameter
• Dist from Leave
• Lateral Offset
• Inner Extension
Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The No of Test Holes

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:96 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

default is as defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user.

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Test Holes.
In Holes Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Test Holes window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Test Holes to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Test Holes component and close the Test Holes Window. The user
will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Test Holes window.

19.3.26 Internal Damper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Internal Damper in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Internal Damper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:97 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• MAIN diameter
• Dist from Leave
Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Internal Damper.
In Handle Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up),
-E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:98 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Internal Damper window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Internal Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Internal Damper component and close the Internal Damper
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Internal Damper window.

19.3.27 Gasket
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Circular in the Categories drop-down list and then Gasket in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Circular Gasket window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Thickness
• Flange Face
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Gasket.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:99 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Gasket window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Gasket to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Gasket component and close the Circular Gasket Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Circular Gasket window.

19.4 Flat Oval

The Flat Oval option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the flat oval
components for selection in the catalogue database.

19.4.1 Flat Oval Straight

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Straight in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Oval Straight window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:100 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Straight.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave
Joint) the user must enter the Width Direction.
In Width Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval Straight window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Oval Straight component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval Straight component and close the Oval Straight Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval Straight window.

19.4.2 Male Coupling

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Male Coupling in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Male Coupling window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:101 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Male Coupling.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave
Joint) the user must enter the Width Direction.
In Width Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:102 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Male Coupling window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Male Coupling component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Male Coupling component and close the Male Coupling Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Male Coupling window.

19.4.3 Flat Oval Taper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Taper in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the FlatOval Taper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:103 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Arrive Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:104 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Leave Extension
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval Taper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct with AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or to exchanges Duct width LA dimension with Duct depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Aoff
Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Flat Oval Taper window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Flat Oval Taper component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Flat Oval Taper component and close the Flat Oval Taper Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Flat Oval Taper window.

19.4.4 ‘A’ Plane Offset

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘A’ plane Offset in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Mitred A Offset window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:105 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Offset
• Arrive cl Throat
• Leave cl Throat
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘A’ Plane Mitred Offset.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:106 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Offset Direction.
In the Offset Direction enter the direction for the Offset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Mitred A Offset window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Mitred A Offset to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Mitred A Offset component and close the Mitred A Offset Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Mitred A Offset window.

19.4.5 ‘B’ Plane Offset

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘B’ plane Offset in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Mitred B Offset window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:107 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Offset
• Arrive cl Throat
• Leave cl Throat
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘B’ Plane Mitred Offset.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:108 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Offset Direction.
In the Offset Direction enter the direction for the Offset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Mitred B Offset window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Mitred B Offset to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Mitred B Offset component and close the Mitred B Offset Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Mitred B Offset window.

19.4.6 ‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the ‘A’ Plane Elbow window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:109 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:110 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the ‘A’ Plane Elbow window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the ‘A’ Plane Elbow component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the ‘A’ Plane Elbow component and close the ‘A’ Plane Elbow Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the ‘A’ Plane Elbow window.

19.4.7 ‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the ‘B’ Plane Elbow window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:111 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:112 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the ‘B’ Plane Elbow window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the ‘B’ Plane Elbow component to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the ‘B’ Plane Elbow component and close the ‘B’ Plane Elbow Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the ‘B’ Plane Elbow window.

19.4.8 ‘A’ Plane 3 Segment

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘A’ Plane 3 Segment A Bend in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the 3 Segment A Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:113 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘A’ Plane 3 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct dept AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:114 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 3 Segment A Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 3 Segment A Bend component to automatically match the outlet
(p-leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 3 Segment A Bend component and close the 3 Segment A Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 3 Segment A Bend window.

19.4.9 ‘B’ Plane 3 Segment

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘B’ Plane 3 Segment B Bend in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the 3 Segment B Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:115 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘B’ Plane 3 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct dept AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:116 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 3 Segment A Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 3 Segment B Bend component to automatically match the outlet
(p-leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 3 Segment B Bend component and close the 3 Segment B Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 3 Segment B Bend window.

19.4.10 ‘A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘A’ Plane 4 Segment A Bend in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the 4 Segment A Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:117 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct dept AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:118 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 4 Segment A Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 4 Segment A Bend component to automatically match the outlet
(p-leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 4 Segment A Bend component and close the 4 Segment A Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 4 Segment A Bend window.

19.4.11 ‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the 4 Segment B Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:119 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct dept AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:120 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 4 Segment B Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 4 Segment B Bend component to automatically match the outlet
(p-leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 4 Segment B Bend component and close the 4 Segment B Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 4 Segment B Bend window.

19.4.12 ‘A’ Plane 5 Segment A Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘A’ Plane 5 Segment A Bend in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the 5 Segment A Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:121 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘A’ Plane 5 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct dept AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:122 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 5 Segment A Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 5 Segment A Bend component to automatically match the outlet
(p-leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 5 Segment A Bend component and close the 5 Segment A Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 5 Segment A Bend window.

19.4.13 ‘B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then ‘B’ Plane 5 Segment B Bend in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the 5 Segment B Bend window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:123 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Angle
• Inside Radius
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for ‘B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct dept AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the Leave
Direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:124 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the 5 Segment B Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the 5 Segment B Bend component to automatically match the outlet
(p-leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the 5 Segment B Bend component and close the 5 Segment B Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the 5 Segment B Bend window.

19.4.14 Flat Oval Cap End

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Cap End in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the FlatOval Cap End window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:125 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Graphical length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Cap End.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to HVAC Components for a
detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint the user must enter the Width
Direction.
In the Width Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the FlatOval Cap End window was
opened.
Click OK to create the FlatOval Cap End component and close the FlatOval Cap End
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the FlatOval Cap End window.

19.4.15 Stiffening
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Stiffening in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Stiffening window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:126 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Stiffener width
• Stiffener depth
• Duct width LA
• Duct width LB
• Spec Requirement
• Number of Sides
• Face from Leave

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:127 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• A offset
• B offset
• Angle
• Stiffener Face
• Other Web
• Web Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Stiffening.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

The application has automatically calculated the required number of stiffeners to support the
CE (using the current detailing specification and other parameters). The number is
displayed in the Spec Requirement box.
The number of sides of the CE is automatically input into the Number of Sides box, in this
case as the CE is a rectangular straight the number of sides is input as 4.

Note: Stiffening flanges are configured to suit each different component.

Click OK the Spec Requirement to confirm the automatically generated number of

stiffeners is compatible with the detailing specification.
If this is not required, click Q Spec Req, to change the automatically generated number of
stiffeners.
After selecting the Spec Requirement the user must enter the Aoff Direction.
In the Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ords 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Stiffening window was opened.
Click OK to create the Stiffening Flanges and close the Stiffening window. The user will
be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Stiffening window.

19.4.16 Access Panel

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Access Panel in the Available
Type drop-down list to display the Access Panel window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:128 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• The user can select a standard stock access panel, using Select Size drop-down list,
the Access Panel (W) and Access Panel (H) fields are populated with the standard
sizes. If a standard stock size is not required, input the following dimensions:
• Access Panel (W)
• Access Panel (H)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:129 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Face over Duct
• Dist from Leave
• Adjustments Offs
• Lateral Offset
• Angle of Slope
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
• Panel Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Access Panel.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Access Panel (W) dimension with Access
Panel (H) dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN width LB
dimension.
In Panel Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -
E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol fields will be pre-
populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the access panel and the ducting,
but can be change by the user to the required joint.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Access Panel window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Access Panel to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Access Panel component and close the Access Panel Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Access Panel window.

19.4.17 Saddle
The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Saddle in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the Saddle window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:130 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Saddle o/all (W)
• Saddle o/all (H)
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Saddle Depth
• Dist from Leave
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
• Saddle Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Saddle.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:131 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

The user can also select a standard stock access panel, using Select Size drop-down list,
the Saddle o/all (W) and Saddle o/all (H) fields are populated with the standard sizes.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Saddle o/all (W) dimension with Saddle o/all
(H) dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN width LB dimension.
In Saddle Direction specify the axis to be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U (Up),
-E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).In the Connect list, select
Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Saddle window was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Saddle to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Saddle component and close the Saddle Window. The user will be
returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Saddle window.

19.4.18 Flat Oval Gasket

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Gasket in the Available Type
drop-down list to display the FlatOval Gasket window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:132 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Thickness
• Flange Face
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Gasket.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
In Width Direction enter the specify the Axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East),
N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).In the
Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Gasket window was opened.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:133 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Fit to orientate the Gasket to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the previous
piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Gasket component and close the Gasket Window. The user will be
returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Gasket window.

19.5 Transformations
The Transformations option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the
Transformations components for selection in the catalogue database.

19.5.1 Square to Round

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Square to Round in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the Square > Round window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:134 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct Diameter
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Rect Extension
• Circ Extension
• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Square to Round.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:135 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Rect and Circ
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Rect Jnt (Rectangular Joint) and Circ Jnt (Circular
Joint). Refer to Create a Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Rect Jnt and Circ Jnt the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoff Direction relative to the Point of Origin.
Valid directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).Using the Flip Arrive/Leave drop-down list, the user can choose whether to
flip the direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC 180° relative to the point of
origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Square > Round window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Square > Round to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Square > Round component and close the Square > Round
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Square > Round window.

19.5.2 Square to Flat Oval

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Square to Flat Oval in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the Square > FlatOval window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:136 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Rect width AA
• Rect depth AB
• Oval width LA
• Oval depth LB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Rect Extension
• Oval Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:137 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Square to Flatoval.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Rect and Oval
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Rect Width AA dimension with Rect depth AB
dimension or exchange Oval width LA dimension with Oval width LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Rect Jnt (Rectangular Joint) and Oval Jnt (Oval Joint).
Refer to Create a Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Rect Jnt and Oval Jnt the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoff Direction relative to the Point of Origin.
Valid directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).Using the Flip Oval/Rect drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip
the direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of
origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Square > Flat Oval window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Square > Flat Oval to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Square > Flat Oval component and close the Square > Flat Oval
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Square > Flat Oval window.

19.5.3 Round to FlatOval

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Round to Flat Oval in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the Round > FlatOval window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:138 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• Oval width LA
• Oval depth LB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset
• Circ Extension
• Oval Extension
• Circ Male Collar
• Oval Male Collar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:139 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flatoval to Round.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Circ and Oval
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Oval width LA dimension with Oval width LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt (Circular Joint) and Oval Jnt (Oval Joint). Refer
to Create a Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt and Oval Jnt the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoff Direction relative to the Point of Origin.
Valid directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).Using the Flip Circ/Oval drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip
the direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of
origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Round > Flat Oval window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Round > Flat Oval to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Round > Flat Oval component and close the Round > Flat Oval
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Round > Flat Oval window.

19.5.4 Oval ‘A’ to Oval ‘B’

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Oval A > Oval B in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval A > Oval B window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:140 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Length
• A offset
• B offset

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:141 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Male Collar A
• Male Collar L
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Oval A to Oval B.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive and Leave
Extension default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension or exchange Duct width LA dimension with Duct width LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).Using the Flip Arri/Leave drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip
the direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of
origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval A > Oval B window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Oval A > Oval B to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval A > Oval B component and close the Oval A > Oval B Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval A > Oval B window.

19.5.5 Spigot Box

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Spigot Box in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Spigot Box window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:142 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• duct width LA
• duct depth LB
• Rect Box Height
• A offset
• B offset
• Circ Extension
• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular to Rectangular Spigot Box.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:143 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange duct width LA dimension with duct width LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt (Circular Joint) and Rect Jnt (Rectangular
Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt and Rect Jnt the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset relative to the Point of Origin. Valid
directions are E (East), N (North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U
(Negative Up).Using the Flip? - Rect > Circ drop-down list, the user can choose whether to
flip the direction of arrive and leave of the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of
origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Spigot Box window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Spigot Box to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Spigot Box component and close the Spigot Box Window. The user
will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Spigot Box window.

19.5.6 Linear Plenum

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Linear Plenum in the
Available Type drop-down list to display the Linear Plenum window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:144 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• duct width LA
• duct depth LB
• Rect Box Height
• Height cl Circ
• A offset
• Circ Extension
• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular to Linear Plenum.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:145 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange duct width LA dimension with duct width LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt (Circular Joint) and Rect Jnt (Rectangular
Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt and Rect Jnt the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In Leave Direction specify the Axis that should be used. Valid Axis are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).Using the Flip? - Rect >
Circ drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the direction of arrive and leave of
the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Linear Plenum window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Linear Plenum to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Linear Plenum component and close the Linear Plenum Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Linear Plenum window.

19.5.7 Circ>Rect Spigot Plate

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Circ>Rect Spigot
Plate in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Spigot Plate window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:146 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Duct Diameter
• duct width LA
• duct depth LB
• A offset
• B offset
• Top Flange
• Right Flange
• Left Flange
• Bottom Flange

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:147 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Circ Extension
• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular to Rectangular Spigot Box.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange duct width LA dimension with duct width LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt (Circular Joint) and Rect Jnt (Rectangular
Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Circ Jnt and Rect Jnt the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoffset. Valid directions are E (East), N (North),
U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).Using the Flip? - Rect >
Circ drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the direction of arrive and leave of
the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Spigot Plate window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Spigot Plate to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Spigot Plate component and close the Spigot Plate Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Spigot Plate window.

19.5.8 Oval>Rect Spigot Plate

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Transformations in the Categories drop-down list and then Oval>Rect Spigot Box
in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Spigot Plate window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:148 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Oval width AA
• Oval depth AB
• Rect duct width
• Rect duct depth
• A offset
• B offset

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:149 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Top Flange
• Right Flange
• Left Flange
• Bottom Flange
• Oval Extension
• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval to Rectangular Spigot Box.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimension. These dimension are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Oval width AA dimension with Oval depth AB
dimension or to exchange Rect width dimension with Rect depth dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Oval Jnt (Oval Joint) and Rect Jnt (Rectangular Joint).
Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Oval Jnt and Rect Jnt the user must enter the
Aoff Direction.
In Aoff Direction enter the direction for the Aoff Direction. Valid directions are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).Using the Flip?
- Rect > Circ drop-down list, the user can choose whether to flip the direction of arrive and
leave of the of the piece of HVAC, 180° relative to the point of origin.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Spigot Plate window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Spigot Plate to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Spigot Plate component and close the Spigot Plate Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Spigot Plate window.

19.6 Branch Connectors

The Branch Connectors option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the
branch connector components for selection in the catalogue database.

Note: All rectangular branch connectors can be fitted to rectangular, circular or flat oval
ducting.

19.6.1 Rectangular Boot r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:150 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR,
Boot r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Boot Brconnector window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Boot width
• Boot depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Boot Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Boot Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:151 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Boot.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Boot Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by
the user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Boot width dimension with Boot depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt (Boot Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt, the user must enter the Boot
Direction.
In Boot Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Boot Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Boot Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Boot Brconnector component and close the Boot Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Boot Brconnector window.

19.6.2 Rectangular Square r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR,
Square r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Square Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:152 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Square.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:153 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to Create/
Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Brco Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Brco Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Brco Brconnector component and close the Brco Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Brco Brconnector window.

19.6.3 Rectangular Fish r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Fish r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Fish Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:154 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Fish width
• Fish depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Fish Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Fish Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Fish.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:155 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fish Extension default
is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing to Duct
joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to
the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Fish width dimension with Fish depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Fish Jnt (Fish Joint). Refer to HVAC Components for a
detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Fish Jnt, the user must enter the Fish
Direction.
In Fish Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Fish Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Fish Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Fish Brconnector component and close the Fish Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Fish Brconnector window.

19.6.4 Rectangular Angled r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Angled r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Angled Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:156 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Angle to Main
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:157 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Angled.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to HVAC
Components for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Angled Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Angled Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Angled Brconnector component and close the Angled
Brconnector Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Angled Brconnector window.

19.6.5 Rectangular Tapered r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Tapered r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Tapering Branch window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:158 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• First width

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:159 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• First depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• Position Boffset
• First Extension
• End Extension
• Taper A offset
• Taper B offset
• Fixing to Duct
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Tapered.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The End Extension default
is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing to Duct
joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user
to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension, to exchange First width dimension with First depth dimension or to exchange
MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to HVAC
Components for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Tapering Branch window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Tapering Branch to automatically fit this piece of HVAC to
the next piece.
Click OK to create the Tapering Branch component and close the Tapering Branch
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Tapering Branch window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:160 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

19.6.6 Circular Boot c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connector in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Boot c in
the Available Type drop-down list to display the Boot Brconnector window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Boot Diameter
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Boot Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Boot Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:161 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Boot.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The End Extension default
is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing to Duct
joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user
to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt (Boot Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt, the user must enter the Boot
Direction.
In Boot Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Boot Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Boot Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Boot Brconnector component and close the Boot Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Boot Brconnector window.

19.6.7 Circular Square c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Square
c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Square Brcoconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:162 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Square.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:163 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Fish Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Square Brcoconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Square Brcoconnector to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Square Brcoconnector component and close the Square
Brcoconnector Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Square Brcoconnector window.

19.6.8 Circular Fish c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Fish c
in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Fish Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:164 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Fish Diameter
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Fish Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Fish Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Fish.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:165 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fish Extension default
is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing to Duct
joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user
to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Fish Jnt (Fish Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Fish Jnt, the user must enter the Fish
Direction.
In Fish Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Fish Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Fish Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Fish Brconnector component and close the Fish Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Fish Brconnector window.

19.6.9 Circular Angled c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Angled
c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Angled Broconnetor window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:166 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco Diameter
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Angle to MAIN
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
• Inner Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:167 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Angled.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Brco Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Angled Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Angled Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Angled Brconnector component and close the Angled
Brconnector Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Angled Brconnector window.

19.6.10 Circular Conical c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Conical
c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Conical Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:168 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco Diameter
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Angle to Sides
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:169 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Conical.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Brco Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by
the user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Brco Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Conical Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Conical Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Conical Brconnector component and close the Conical
Brconnector Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Conical Brconnector window.

19.6.11 Circular Square-Round c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Square-
Round c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the SQRD Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:170 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco Diameter
• Square width
• Square depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:171 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• Position Boffset
• Rect Extension
• Circ Extension
• Sqrd A offset
• Sqrd B offset
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Square.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Circ Extension default
is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing to Duct
joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user
to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Square width dimension with Square depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Brco Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the SQRD Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the SQRD Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the SQRD Brconnector component and close the SQRD Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the SQRD Brconnector window.

19.6.12 Circular Mitred c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Mitred
c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Mitred Brconnector window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:172 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco Diameter
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Mitred.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:173 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Brco Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the
user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Brco Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Mitred Brconnector window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Mitred Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Mitred Brconnector component and close the Mitred Brconnector
Window. The user will be returned to the Create/Modify HVAC Component.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Mitred Brconnector window.

19.6.13 Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL ‘A’
Boot f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘A’Boot Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:174 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Boot width
• Boot depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Boot Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Boot Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:175 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Boot Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by
the user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Boot width dimension with Boot depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt (Boot Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt, the user must enter the Boot
Direction.
In Boot Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘A’Boot Brconnector window
was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘A’Boot Brconnector to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘A’Boot Brconnector component and close the Oval ‘A’Boot
Brconnector Window. The user will be returned to the Create/Modify HVAC Component.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘A’Boot Brconnector window.

19.6.14 Flat Oval ‘B’ Boot f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then OVAL FLAT B Boot
f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘B’Boot Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:176 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Boot width
• Boot depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Boot Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Boot Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:177 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval ‘B’ Boot.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Boot Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by
the user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Boot width dimension with Boot depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt (Boot Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Boot Jnt, the user must enter the Boot
Direction.
In Boot Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘B’Boot Brconnector window
was opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘B’Boot Brconnector to automatically fit this piece
of HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘B’Boot Brconnector component and close the Oval ‘B’Boot
Brconnector Window. The user will be returned to the Create/Modify HVAC Component.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘B’Boot Brconnector window.

19.6.15 Flat Oval ‘A’ Square f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL ‘A’
Square f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘A’ Square Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:178 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:179 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval ‘B’ Square.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to Create/
Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘A’ Square Brco window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘A’ Square Brco to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘A’ Square Brco component and close the Oval ‘A’ Square
Brco Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘A’ Square Brco window.

19.6.16 Flat Oval ‘B’ Square f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL ‘B’
Boot f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘B’ Square Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:180 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
• Inner Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:181 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval ‘B’ Square.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to Create/
Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘B’ Square Brco window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘B’ Square Brco to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘B’ Square Brco component and close the Oval ‘B’ Square
Brco Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘B’ Square Brco window.

19.6.17 Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connector in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL ‘A’ Fish
f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘A’Fish Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:182 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:183 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Inner Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Brco Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by
the user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to Create/
Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘A’ Fish Brco window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘A’ Fish Brco to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘A’ Fish Brco component and close the Oval ‘A’ Fish
BrcoWindow. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘A’ Fish Brco window.

19.6.18 Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL ‘B’
Fish f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘B’ Fish Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:184 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Male Collar
• Inner Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:185 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Brco Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension. The Fixing
to Duct joint default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by
the user to the required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to Create/
Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘B’ Fish Brco window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘B’ Fish Brco to automatically fit this piece of HVAC
to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘B’ Fish Brco component and close the Oval ‘B’ Fish
BrcoWindow. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘B’ Fish Brco window.

19.6.19 Flat Oval ‘A’ Angled f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then OVAL FLAT Angled
f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘A’ Angled f Brco window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:186 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Angle to Main
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:187 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Angled.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to HVAC
Components for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘A’ Angled Brco window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘A’ Angled Brco to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘A’ Angled Brco component and close the Oval ‘A’ Angled
Brco Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘A’ Angled Brco window.

19.6.20 Flat Oval ‘B’ Angled f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Branch Connectors in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL ‘B’
Angled f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval ‘B’ Angled f Brco
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:188 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Brco width
• Brco depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• Angle to Main
• Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Brco Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• Inner Extension

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:189 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Angled.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be change by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco width dimension with Brco depth
dimension or to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with MAIN depth LB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt (Branch Connector Joint). Refer to HVAC
Components for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Brco Jnt, the user must enter the Brco
Direction.
In Brco Direction specify axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the piece of HVAC at
the co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the piece
of HVAC but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval ‘B’ Angled Brco window was
opened.
Click Fit To Next to orientate the Oval ‘B’ Angled Brco to automatically fit this piece of
HVAC to the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval ‘B’ Angled Brco component and close the Oval ‘B’ Angled
Brco Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all field changes and close the Oval ‘B’ Angled Brco window.

19.7 Inline Equipment

The Inline Equipment option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the Inline
Equipment components for selection in the catalogue database.

19.7.1 Rectangular Fire Damper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Fire Damper r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Rectangular Fire
Damper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:190 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• FD Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Curtain Height
• Right Width
• Left Width
• Bottom Width
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Fire Damper.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:191 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Manufacturer cannot
be changed.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Curtain Direction.
In the Curtain Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Rectangular Fire Damper window
was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Rectangular Fire Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Rectangular Fire Damper component and close the Rectangular
Fire Damper Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Rectangular Fire Damper
window.

19.7.2 Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Flanged Fire Damper r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Rectangular
Flanged FD window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:192 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• FD Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Control Direction

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:193 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to HVAC Components for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Control Direction.
In the Control Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Actuator
fields will be pre-populated with default values but can be changed by the user.
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Rectangular Flanged FD window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Rectangular Flanged FD to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Rectangular Flanged FD component and close the Rectangular
Flanged FD Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Rectangular Flanged FD
window.

19.7.3 Rectangular Control Damper

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Control Damper r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Control Damper
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:194 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• VCD Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Handle Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Control Damper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:195 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Handle Direction.
In the Handle Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Control Damper window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Control Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Control Damper component and close the Control Damper
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Control Damper window.

19.7.4 Rectangular Motorised Damper r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Motorised Damper r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Motorised
Damper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:196 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• MVCD Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Spindle Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Motorised Damper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:197 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Spindle Direction.
In the Spindle Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Motorised Damper window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Motorised Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Motorised Damper component and close the Motorised Damper
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Motorised Damper window.

19.7.5 Rectangular Heater Battery r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Heater Battery r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Heater Battery
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:198 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• HB Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Heater Battery.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to HVAC Components for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Pipes Direction.
In the Pipes Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:199 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Heater Battery window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Heater Battery to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Heater Battery component and close the Heater Battery Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Heater Battery window.

19.7.6 Rectangular Cooler Battery r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Cooler Battery r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Cooler Battery
window:

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• CB Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:200 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Cooler Battery.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Pipes Direction.
In the Pipes Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Cooler Battery window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Cooler Battery to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Cooler Battery component and close the Cooler Battery Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Cooler Battery window.

19.7.7 Rectangular Silencer r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Silencer r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Silencer window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:201 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Width Direction
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Silencer.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Width Direction.
In the Width Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:202 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Silencer window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Silencer to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the previous
piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Silencer component and close the Silencer Window. The user will
be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Silencer window.

19.7.8 Rectangular Attenuated Bend r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Attenuated Bend r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Attenuated Bend
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:203 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Duct width LA
• Arrive Throat
• Leave Throat
• Inside Radius
• Back Radius
• Arri Back Fillet
• PL to Back Fillet

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:204 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Arri Thrt Fillet

• PL to Thrt Fillet
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Attenuated Bend.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Leave Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Attenuated Bend window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Attenuated Bend to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Attenuated Bend component and close the Attenuated Bend
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Attenuated Bend window.

19.7.9 Rectangular General Plant Item r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then General Plant
Item in the Available Type drop-down list to display the General Plant Item window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:205 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular General Plant Item.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:206 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Operator Side.
In the Operator Side specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the General Plant Item window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the General Plant Item to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the General Plant Item component and close the General Plant Item
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the General Plant Item window.

19.7.10 Rectangular Grille Brco r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
GRILLE off Brco r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Off Brco Grille
window:

Note: The HVAC component can only be created following a HVAC branch connector
element in the design hierarchy.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:207 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The HVAC component can only be created under a branch connector element.

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Unit Name(Ref)
• Brco width

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:208 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Brco depth
• End width
• End depth
• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• O/A Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Grille Length
• ‘A’ Extension
• Fixing to Brco
• End Joint
• End Joint Width
• End Joint Depth
• End Jt Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Grille Off Branch Connector.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco Width dimension with the Brco Width
dimension.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange End Width dimension with the End Width
dimension.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with the MAIN depth
LB dimension.
In the Grille Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol OUT field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the
Off Brco Grille and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Off Brco Grille window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Off Brco Grille to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Off Brco Grille component and close the Off Brco Grille Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Off Brco Grille window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:209 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

19.7.11 Rectangular Grille in line r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select In line Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then
RECTANGULAR Grille in line r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the In line
Grille window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:210 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Unit Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• End width
• End depth
• Grille Length
• ‘A’ Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• End Joint
• End Joint Width
• End Joint Depth
• End Jt Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Grille (in line).

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user to the
required joint.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Brco Width dimension with the Brco Width
dimension.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange End Width dimension with the End Width
dimension.
In the Width Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol OUT field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the
In line Grille and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the In line Grille window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the In line Grille to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the In line Grille component and close the In line Grille Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the In line Grille window.

19.7.12 Rectangular Air Handling Unit

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:211 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then RECTANGULAR
Air Handling Unit r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Handling Unit
window:

Note: An air handling unit can only be created as the first item in a HVAC branch.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:212 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• First width AA
• First depth AB
• Second width
• Second depth
• Third width
• Third depth
• O/All Unit Length
• O/All Unit Width
• O/All Unit Height
• Base Height
• First Height
• Second Height
• Third EndPosition
• First Extension
• Second Extension
• Third Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Air Handling Unit.
• The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange First width AA dimension with the First depth
AB dimension.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Second width dimension with the Second
depth dimension.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Third width dimension with the Third depth
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint), Leajoint (Leave joint) and
Brajoint (Branch Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed
description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Handling Unit window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Air Handling Unit to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:213 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click OK to create the Air Handling Unit component and close the Air Handling Unit
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Handling Unit window.

19.7.13 Rectangular Centrifugal Fan r

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Centrifugal Fan
r in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Centrifugal Fan window:

Note: An centrifugal fan can only be created as the first item in a HVAC branch.

Centrifugal Fans can be left or right handed, from the Type drop-down list, select Left or
Right.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:214 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Rect width AA
• Rect depth AB
• Circular Diameter
• Centrifugal Fans can be left or right handed, from the Type drop-down list, select Left
or Right.
• Outside Diameter
• Centreline Height
• Circ Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Centrifugal Fan.
• The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Rect width AA dimension with the Rect depth
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Rect Jnt (Rectangular Joint) and Circ Jnt (Circular
joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Rect Jnt and Circ Jnt the user must enter the
Circ Direction.
In the Circ Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Centrifugal Fan window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Centrifugal Fan to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Centrifugal Fan component and close the Centrifugal Fan Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Centrifugal Fan window.

19.7.14 Circular Fire Damper c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR Fire
Damper c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Circular Fire Damper
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:215 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• FD Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Length
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Curtain Height
• Right Width
• Left Width
• Bottom Width
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Fire Damper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Manufacturer cannot
be changed.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:216 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Curtain Direction.
In the Curtain Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Fire Damper window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Fire Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Fire Damper component and close the Circular Fire
Damper Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Circular Fire Damper window.

19.7.15 Circular Flanged Fire Damper c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR
Flanged FD in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Circular Flanged FD
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:217 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• FFD Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Square Body Size

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:218 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Body Flanged Size

• Length
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Flanged Fire Damper.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Control Direction.
In the Control Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Actuator
fields will be pre-populated with default values but can be changed by the user.
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Flanged FD window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Flanged FD to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Flanged FD component and close the Circular Flanged FD
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Circular Flanged FD window.

19.7.16 Circular Control Damper c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR
Control Damper c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Control Damper
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:219 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• VCD Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Square Body Size
• Body Flange Size
• Length
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Control Damper.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:220 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Handle Direction.
In the Handle Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Control Damper window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Control Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Control Damper component and close the Control Damper
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Control Damper window

19.7.17 Circular Axial Flow Fan c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR
Axial Flow Fan in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Axial Flow Fan window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:221 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Overall Length
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
• Motor Height
• Motor Length
• Motor Width
• Motor Pos to Pa
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Axial Flow Fan.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:222 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Motor Direction.
In the Motor Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Axial Flow Fan window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Axial Flow Fan to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Axial Flow Fan component and close the Axial Flow Fan Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Axial Flow Fan window.

19.7.18 Circular Silencer c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR
Silencer c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Circular Silencer window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:223 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Outer Diameter
• Overall Length
• Extension (A)
• Extension (L)
• Male Collar (A)
• Male Collar (L)
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Silencer.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Extension (A) and
Extension (L) default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required
dimension.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:224 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:

• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circular Silencer window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circular Silencer to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circular Silencer component and close the Circular Silencer
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Circular Silencer window.

19.7.19 Circular General Plant Item c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR
General Plant Item in the Available Type drop-down list to display the General Plant Item
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:225 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Body Size (X)
• Body Size (Y)
• Body Flange Size

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:226 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Length
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular General Plant Item.
• The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Operator Side.
In the Operator Side specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields will be pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the
rectangular flanged FD component and the ducting, but can be changed by the user.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the General Plant Item window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the General Plant Item to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of
the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the General Plant Item component and close the General Plant Item
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the General Plant Item window.

19.7.20 Grille Off Brco c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Grille off brco c
in the Available Type drop-down list.

Note: The HVAC component can only be created following a HVAC branch connector
element in the design hierarchy.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:227 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Unit Name(Ref)
• Brco Diameter
• End Diameter

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:228 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• MAIN width LA
• MAIN depth LB
• O/A Brco Length
• Dist from Leave
• B offset
• Grille Length
• ‘A’ Extension
• Fixing to Brco
• End Joint
• End Joint Width
• End Joint Depth
• End Jt Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Grille Off Branch Connector.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange MAIN width LA dimension with the MAIN depth
LB dimension.
In the Grille Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol OUT field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the
Off Brco Grille and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Off Brco Grille window was opened.
Click Fit to Next to orientate the Off Brco Grille to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Off Brco Grille component and close the Off Brco Grille Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Off Brco Grille window.

19.7.21 Circular Grille in line c

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then CIRCULAR
Grille in line c in the Available Type drop-down list to display the In-line Grille window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:229 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Unit Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• End Diameter
• Grille Length
• ‘A’ Extension
• Fixing to Duct
• End Joint
• End Joint Width
• End Joint Depth
• End Jt Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Grille (in line).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:230 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Fixing to Duct joint
default is joint defined in the HVAC Catalogue but can be changed by the user to the
required joint.

The Clash Vol OUT field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the
Off Brco Grille and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the In line Grille window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the In line Grille to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the In line Grille component and close the In lineGrille Window. The
user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the In line Grille window.

19.7.22 Flat Oval Fire Damper f

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Inline Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then FLAT OVAL fire
damper f in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Oval Fire Damper window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:231 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• FD Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Length
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
• Curtain Height
• Right Width
• Left Width
• Bottom Width
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Oval Fire Damper.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:232 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Manufacturer cannot
be changed.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct Width AA dimension with the Duct Width
AB dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Curtain Direction.
In the Curtain Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Oval Fire Damper window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Oval Fire Damper to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Oval Fire Damper component and close the Oval Fire Damper
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Oval Fire Damper window.

19.8 Extra Inline Equipment

The Extra Inline Equipment option of the Categories drop-down list is an umbrella for the
Inline Equipment components for selection in the catalogue database.

19.8.1 Flat Low Vel’ Terminal

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Flat Low Vel’
Terminal in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Flat LV Terminal window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:233 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The Flat LV Terminal window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by the
user using the following two methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:234 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Main Sizes and Sock Branch Size drop-down lists, click the required dimensions for the
HVAC component.
In the Handling drop-down list, click the Handling of the Flat LV Terminal.

In the Direction X specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Face Clash Volume
field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the Flat LV Terminal and
the ducting.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Main Sizes
drop-down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• End Width (A)
• End Height (D)
• End Depth
• Plenum Width (B)
• Plenum Height (E)
• Plenum Depth (G)
• Top Width (C)
• Top Height
• Top Depth (F)
• Top to Conn cl(l)
• Centreline Offset
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Flat Low Velocity Terminal.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint) and Leajoint (Leave Joint). Refer
to Create/Modify HVAC Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint and Leajoint the user must enter the
Direction X.
In the Direction X specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N (North), U
(Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Face Clash Volume field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Flat LV Terminal and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:235 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

The user can orientate the face of the Flat LV Terminal component, from the Handling
drop-down list, select Face Back or Face Front.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Flat LV Terminal window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Flat LV Terminal to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Flat LV Terminal component and close the Flat LV Terminal
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Flat LV Terminal window.

19.8.2 Corner Mount LV Terminal

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Corner Mount
LV Terminal in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Corner Mounting LVT
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:236 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The Corner Mounting LVT window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by
the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Face Clash
Vol field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the Corner Mounting
LVT and the ducting.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Body Radius (A)
• Body Length (B)
• Body clHeight (D)
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for LV Terminal for Corner Mounting.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Front
Direction.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Front Clash Vol field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the
Corner Mounting LVT and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:237 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Corner Mounting LVT window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Corner Mounting LVT to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Corner Mounting LVT component and close the Corner Mounting
LVT Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Corner Mounting LVT window.

19.8.3 Semi-C Air Displacement

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Semi-C Air
Displacement in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Displacement Unit
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:238 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The Air Displacement Unit window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by
the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol
fields are pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the Air Displacement
Unit and the ducting.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Body Radius (A)
• Body Length (B)
• Body clHeight (D)
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Semi Circular Air Displacement Unit.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Front
Direction.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields are pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the Air
Displacement Unit component and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:239 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Displacement Unit window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Air Displacement Unit to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Air Displacement Unit component and close the Air Displacement
Unit Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Displacement Unit window.

19.8.4 Circ Air Displacement Unit

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Circ Air
Displacement Unit in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Displacement
Unit window:

The Air Displacement Unit window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by
the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:240 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol
Diameter field is pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the Air
Displacement Unit and the ducting.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Body Diameter (A)
• Body Length (B)
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Air Displacement Unit.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Front
Direction.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The ClashVol Diameter field is pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Air Displacement Unit component and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Displacement Unit window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Air Displacement Unit to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Air Displacement Unit component and close the Air Displacement
Unit Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:241 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Displacement Unit window.

19.8.5 Rect Air Displacement Unit

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Rect Air
Displacement Unit in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Displacement
Unit window:

The Air Displacement Unit window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by
the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:242 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol
fields are pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the Air Displacement
Unit and the ducting.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Body Width (A)
• Body Length (B)
• Body Height (C)
• Body clHeight (E)
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Air Displacement Unit.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Front
Direction.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields are pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with the
Rect Air Displacement Unit component and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Displacement Unit window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Air Displacement Unit to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Air Displacement Unit component and close the Air Displacement
Unit Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:243 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Displacement Unit window.

19.8.6 Rect Disp Unit - Rect Conn

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Rect Disp Unit -
Rect Conn in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Displacement Unit
window:

The Air Displacement Unit window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by
the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:244 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).The Clash Vol
fields are pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the Air Displacement
Unit and the ducting.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• Body Width (A)
• Body Length (B)
• Body Height (C)
• Body clHeight (E)
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Air Displacement Unit with Rectangular Connection.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Front
Direction.
In the Front Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The Clash Vol fields are pre-populated with the obstruction volumes associated with the Air
Displacement Unit component and the ducting.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Displacement Unit window was
opened.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:245 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Fit to orientate the Air Displacement Unit to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Air Displacement Unit component and close the Air Displacement
Unit Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Displacement Unit window.

19.8.7 Connection Box Circ-Circ

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Connection Box
Circ-Circ in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Connection Box window:

The Connection Box window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by the
user using one of the following methods:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:246 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter ‘A’
• Duct Diameter ‘L’
• Box Width
• Box Depth
• Box Length
• A Offset
• B Offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Connection Box ‘Circ Inlet - Circ Outlet’.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange the Box Width dimension with the Box Depth
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In the Leave Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:247 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Connection Box window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Connection Box to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Connection Box component and close the Connection Box
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Connection Box window.

19.8.8 Connection Box Circ-Rect

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Connection Box
Circ- Rect in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Connection Box window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:248 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The Connection Box window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by the
user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:249 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
The user can select the location of the circular entry on the rectangular box, using the Circ
Entry drop-down list select: On SIDE of box, On TOP of box, On FRONT of box.
In the Key Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• The user can select the location of the circular entry on the rectangular box, using the
Circ Entry drop-down list select: On SIDE of box, On TOP of box, On FRONT of
box.
• Duct Diameter ‘A’
• Duct width LA
• Duct depth LB
• Box Width
• Box Depth
• Box Length
• A Offset
• B Offset
• Arrive Extension
• Leave Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Connection Box with ‘Circ Inlet - Rect Outlet’.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange the Duct Width LA dimension with the Duct
Depth LB dimension.
Click Transpose width/depth to exchange the Box Width dimension with the Box Depth
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Leave
Direction.
In the Key Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:250 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Connection Box window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Connection Box to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Connection Box component and close the Connection Box
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Connection Box window.

19.8.9 Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Circ Diffuser -
Circ Inlet in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet
window:

The Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed
by the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:251 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
The ClashVol OUT field will be pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet and the ducting, but can be changed by the user to the required
joint.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Outlet Diameter
• Body Length
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Diffuser with Circular Inlet.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
The ClashVol OUT field will be pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet and the ducting, but can be changed by the user to the required
joint.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet component and close the Circ Diffuser -
Circ Inlet Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet
window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:252 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

19.8.10 Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Rect Diffuser -
Circ Inlet in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet
window:

The Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed
by the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Width Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:253 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The ClashVol OUT field will be pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet and the ducting, but can be changed by the user to the required
joint.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Outlet Width
• Outlet Depth
• Body Length
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Diffuser with Circular Inlet.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Width
Direction.
In the Width Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The ClashVol OUT field will be pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet and the ducting, but can be changed by the user to the required
joint.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet to automatically match the outlet (p-
leave) of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet component and close the Rect Diffuser -
Circ Inlet Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet
window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:254 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

19.8.11 Rect Grille - Rect Inlet

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Rect Grille -
Rect Inlet in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Rect Grille - Rect Inlet
window:

The Rect Grille - Rect Inlet window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by
the user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.
In the Width Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:255 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The ClashVol OUT field will be pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet and the ducting, but can be changed by the user to the required
joint.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct width AA
• Duct depth AB
• End Flange Width
• Flange Thickness
• Insertion Length
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Rectangular Grille with Rectangular Inlet’.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Click Transpose width/depth to exchange Duct width AA dimension with Duct depth AB
dimension.
Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
After selecting the type of joint to use for the Arrjoint, the user must enter the Width
Direction.
In the Width Direction specify the axis that should be used. Valid axes are E (East), N
(North), U (Up), -E (negative East), -N (negative North) or -U (Negative Up).
The ClashVol OUT field will be pre-populated with the obstruction volume associated with
the Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet and the ducting, but can be changed by the user to the required
joint.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Rect Grille - Circ Inlet window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Rect Grille - Circ Inlet to automatically match the outlet (p-leave)
of the previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Rect Grille - Circ Inlet component and close the Rect Grille - Circ
Inlet Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:256 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Rect Grille - Circ Inlet window.

19.8.12 Circular Air Intake Hood

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Circular Air
Intake Hood in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Intake Hood window:

The Air Intake Hood window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by the
user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Overall Diameter

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:257 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Overall Height
• Cowl Height
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Air Intake Hood.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Intake Hood window was opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Air Intake Hood to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Air Intake Hood component and close the Air Intake Hood Window.
The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Intake Hood window.

19.8.13 Circular Air Extract Hood

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Extra Plant Equipment in the Categories drop-down list and then Circular Air
Extract Hood in the Available Type drop-down list to display the Air Extract Hood
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:258 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The Air Extract Hood window default is a standard stock size, but can be changed by the
user using one of the following methods:

Standard Stock Sizes

In the Name(Ref) field, input the name of the HVAC component.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. Mid Section Heig and
Arrive Taper Heig can be changed by the user.

To choose from the standard stock sizes available from the HVAC Catalogue, in the Stock
Size drop-down list, click the required dimension for the HVAC component.

Non Standard Stock Sizes (Special)

If the user chooses not to use a standard stock piece of HVAC, from the Stock Sizes drop-
down list, click Special.
The user is required to input the following dimensions:
• Name(Ref)
• Duct Diameter
• Top Diameter
• Overall Diameter

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:259 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

• Cowl Height
• Mid Section Heig
• Arrive Taper Heig
• Arrive Extension
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for Circular Air Extract Hood.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the Air Extract Hood window was
opened.
Click Fit to orientate the Air Extract Hood to automatically match the outlet (p-leave) of the
previous piece of HVAC to the inlet (p-arrive) of the next piece.
Click OK to create the Air Extract Hood component and close the Air Extract Hood
Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Cancel to discard all the field changes and close the Air Extract Hood window.

19.9 Equipment Nozzles

HVAC Equipment nozzles act as an interface point between pieces of equipment and the
connecting HVAC ducting, the user can create, then position and orientate the HVAC
Nozzle.

Note: Before a HVAC Equipment Nozzle can be created, a piece of equipment must be
created first, refer to Equipment User Guide.

All of the HVAC Equipment Nozzle windows are dual purpose windows allowing the user to
either Create a new HVAC Equipment Nozzle element (by default) or Modify the attributes
of an existing HVAC Equipment Nozzle.

19.9.1 Rectangular Nozzle

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select PDMS Equipment Nozzles in the Categories drop-down list and then Rectangular
Nozzle in the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:260 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• The user can select a Duct/Nozzle Shape, using Duct/Nozzle Shape drop-down list
• Duct width
• Duct depth
• Overall Length
• End Flange Width
• End Flange Length
• Flange Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for HVAC Equipment Nozzles.

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:261 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Modify Orientation
The user can modify the orientation of the existing nozzle, refer to Orientation.

Modify Position
The user can modify the position of the existing nozzle, refer to Position.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the HVAC Equipment Nozzle window
was opened.
Click Apply to create the HVAC Equipment Nozzle component and close the HVAC
Equipment Nozzle Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Dismiss to discard all the field changes and close the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window.

19.9.2 Circular Nozzle

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
From the HVAC Window select PDMS Equipment Nozzle in the Categories drop-down list
and then Circular Nozzle in the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC
Equipment Nozzle window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:262 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• The user can select a Duct/Nozzle Shape, using Duct/Nozzle Shape drop-down list
• Duct width
• Duct depth
• Overall Length
• End Flange Width
• End Flange Length
• Flange Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for HVAC Equipment Nozzles.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:263 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Modify Orientation
The user can modify the orientation of the existing nozzle, refer to Orientation.

Modify Position
The user can modify the position of the existing nozzle, refer to Position.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the HVAC Equipment Nozzle window
was opened.
Click Apply to create the HVAC Equipment Nozzle component and close the HVAC
Equipment Nozzle Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Dismiss to discard all the field changes and close the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window.

19.9.3 Flat Oval Nozzle

The task of creating an HVAC Component is initiated from the HVAC Window.
From the HVAC Window select Flat Oval in the Categories drop-down list and then Flat
Oval Nozzle in the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:264 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The user is required to input the following dimensions:

• Name(Ref)
• The user can select a Duct/Nozzle Shape, using Duct/Nozzle Shape drop-down list
• Duct width
• Duct depth
• Overall Length
• End Flange Width
• End Flange Length
• Flange Thickness
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing for HVAC Equipment Nozzles.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:265 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Note: The fields will be pre-populated with default dimensions. These dimensions are
governed by the details defined in the HVAC Catalogue. The Arrive Extension
default is auto but can be changed by the user to a required dimension.

Specify a type of joint to use for the Arrjoint (Arrive Joint). Refer to Create/Modify HVAC
Component for a detailed description.
In the Connect list, select Connect or Unchanged:
• Click Connect (default when Create is selected) - connects the piece of HVAC to the
previous one.
• Click Unchanged (default when Modify is selected) - positions the component at the
co-ordinates 0.00.
Note: Unchanged is usually used, when Modify is selected, it does not connect the
component but positions it at 0.00, in effect in a floating position.

Modify Orientation
The user can modify the orientation of the existing nozzle, refer to Orientation.

Modify Position
The user can modify the position of the existing nozzle, refer to Position.
Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the HVAC Equipment Nozzle window
was opened.
Click Apply to create the HVAC Equipment Nozzle component and close the HVAC
Equipment Nozzle Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Dismiss to discard all the field changes and close the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window.

19.9.4 Modify Existing Nozzle

To modify an existing HVAC Equipment Nozzle element first select an existing HVAC
Equipment Nozzle element in the Design Explorer.
Select Equipment Nozzles in the Categories drop-down list and then Modify Existing
Nozzle in the Available Type drop-down list to display the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:266 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The HVAC Equipment Nozzle window will be populated with attributes of the currently
selected element and the drop-down list in the top left of the window now has Modify as the
default.
To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC, click Picture to display
a detailed drawing.
The user can now type in new attribute dimensions for the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
element then click OK to commit the changes.

Modify Orientation
The user can modify the orientation of the existing nozzle, refer to Orientation.

Modify Position
The user can modify the position of the existing nozzle, refer to Position.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:267 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Defaults to reset all the fields back to when the HVAC Equipment Nozzle window
was opened.
Click Apply to create the HVAC Equipment Nozzle component and close the HVAC
Equipment Nozzle Window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.
Click Dismiss to discard all the field changes and close the HVAC Equipment Nozzle
window.

19.10 User Defined Fittings

Although it is recommended that the standard components supplied in the HVAC Catalogue
are used. There are occasions when non-standard HVAC components or user defined
fittings are required. Before the user can select a user defined fitting, the system
administrator must first create the user defined catalogue and specifications. Refer to the
system administrator or System Administrator’s Guide.
All HVAC Component windows are dual purpose windows allowing the user to either
Create a new HVAC Component element (by default) or Modify the attributes of an
existing HVAC Component element.
The task of creating a User Defined Fitting is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select User Defined Fittings in the Categories drop-down list, the User Defined HVAC
Fittings window:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:268 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

The User Defined HVAC Fittings window is a dual purpose window allowing the user to
either Create a new User Defined HVAC Fitting (by default) or Modify a User Defined HVAC
Fitting.
The user can select from the drop-down list, the fittings available in the HVAC Fittings
Catalogue.

For the purposes of this user guide, the Specification Data including HVAC Fittings
Catalogue only contains the supplied catalogues provided by AVEVA. Catalogues are
populated by the System Administrator.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:269 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Select an item from the choice available in the lower window, the selection is placed in the
current selection window and the list of available choices moves down to the next level
dependent upon what element is chosen. Continue to select from the available choices in
the lower window until the fitting is complete.
To only select the default item for each level from the lower window, click to select the
Default checkbox.
To automatically select an item when there is only one available at any level, click to select
the Auto checkbox.

Note: If both Default and Auto checkboxes are selected, the default item for each level
and (if all levels have a default set) an overall default fitting will be selected.‘

For more detailed descriptions on Joints and Connect drop-down list, refer to HVAC
Window.

19.10.1 User Defined Fittings Plotfile

To visualise how the dimensions equate to the actual piece of HVAC click Plotfile to display
a detailed drawing to refer to all the available HVAC Components as an annotated
drawings, refer to HVAC Catalogue.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:270 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Properties to view the user defined fitting parameters displayed in the Modify
Properties window:

If the default parameters are not suitable, the user can then amend the available parameters
as required and click Reset to change the parameters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:271 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click OK to close the Modify Properties window.

Click Cancel to close the Modify Properties window.
From the drop-down list, select Connect or Unchanged:
Click Default to clear all the dimensions currently in the window and set them to the
dimensions when the window was first opened.
Click Reset to change the properties of the HVAC Component and close the Modify
Properties window. The user will be returned to the HVAC Window.

19.10.2 Modify User Defined HVAC Fittings

The attributes of an existing user defined fitting can be modified. The attributes that can be
modified is dependent upon which item has been selected.
First the user must select the element, piece of HVAC or equipment in the design explorer,
then select User Defined Fittings in the Categories drop-down list to display the User
Defined HVAC Fittings window.
The Create/Modify window for the selected item is displayed, with Modify as the default.
The user can now modify the attributes as required and then click Apply to commit the
changes.

19.11 Assemblies
Assemblies are a series of components and branches in a predefined configuration which
can be copied into the Design many times. Assemblies are created using the HVAC
Assemblies utility, refer to HVAC Assembly, these assemblies can then be selected from the
Categories drop-down list by the user.
The task of copying an assembly is initiated from the HVAC Window.
Select Assemblies in the Categories drop-down list, the HVAC Assembly Creation
window is displayed:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:272 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

If required, select the Display Name/Description checkbox, to display the available

assemblies by description. Otherwise the assemblies are displayed by Name.

Create connected to element

The user can copy an HVAC assembly from the HVAC Catalogue and connect it to an
identified element.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:273 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Create connected to element

The user is prompted to identify the element in the 3D graphical view. The HVAC
Assembly is connected to the identified element.

Create at tube position

The user can copy an HVAC Assembly from the HVAC Catalogue and connect it to an
identified point on the tube.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:274 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

Click Create at tube position, the user is prompted to identify an Insertion Point in Tube
in the 3D graphical view.

The HVAC Assembly is connected to the identified point in the tube.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:275 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
Components

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 19:276 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20 HVAC Catalogue

The section gives an introduction to the way the HVAC catalogue is used in creating the
design model and lists the principal features of some standard catalogue components to
which the user may want to refer when creating the design model. (For full details of the way
in which the catalogue is built up and used, refer to the Catalogues and Specifications
Reference Manual.)

20.1 Basic Features of the Catalogue

All HVAC components used in the design are selected from the Catalogue database by
setting the Specification Reference for the corresponding design element so that it points
to the required catalogue entry.
Each catalogue item is defined in terms of two subsidiary sets of data:
• A Geometry Set, which defines the overall physical shape of the item in terms of a set
of 3D basic shapes (known as primitives). A geometry set can include negative 3D
primitives to represent holes.
• A Point Set, which defines a number of reference points and directions superimposed
on the geometric shape so that individual parts of that shape can be identified and
manipulated. These reference points, each of which represents a 1D point position, are
called p-points.
A range of catalogue components with similar overall geometry will all reference the
same geometry set and point set, so that the amount of data needed to represent all
possible items is kept to a minimum. The dimensions of the items are not fixed in the
catalogue but are expressed in terms of Design parameters. dimensions are allocated
to these parameterised dimensions when the item is used in a specific part of the
design model: they may either be set explicitly or derived from associated dimensions
of other design components to which the item is to be connected.

20.2 Branches
The Branches section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the branches available for
selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.2.1 Main Branch

The Main Branch picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.2.2 Side Branch

The Side Branch picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3 Rectangular
The Rectangular section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the rectangular components in
available for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.3.1 Straight
The Rectangular Straight picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.2 Taper
The Rectangular Taper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.3 Cranked Taper

The Rectangular Cranked Taper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.4 Square Bend

The Rectangular Square Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.5 Radius Bend

The Rectangular Radius Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.6 Mitred Elbow

The Rectangular Mitred Elbow picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.7 Crank Offset

The Rectangular Crank Offset picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.8 Mitred Offset

The Rectangular Mitred Offset picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.9 Radius Offset

The Rectangular Radius Offset picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.10 Radius Threeway

The Rectangular Radius Threeway picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.11 Twin Bend Threeway

The Rectangular Twin Bend Threeway picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.12 Breeches Threeway

The Rectangular Breeches Threeway picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.13 Square Threeway

The Rectangular Square Threeway picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.14 Cap End

The Rectangular Cap End picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.15 Mesh End

The Rectangular Mesh End picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.16 Material Connection

The Rectangular Material Connection picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.17 Weather Skirt

The Rectangular Weather Skirt picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.18 Two Bend Setfill

The Rectangular Two Bend Setfill picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.19 Stiffener
The Rectangular Stiffener picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.20 Access Panel

The Rectangular Access Panel picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.21 Test Holes

The Rectangular Test Holes picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.22 ‘A’ Plane Splitter

The Rectangular ‘A’ Plane Splitter picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.23 ‘B’ Plane Splitter

The Rectangular ‘B’ Plane Splitter picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.24 Radius Splitter

The Rectangular Radius Splitter picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.25 Deflectrol
The Rectangular Deflectrol picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.3.26 Internal Damper

The Rectangular Internal Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.27 Gasket
The Rectangular Gasket picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.3.28 Turning Vanes

The Rectangular Turning Vanes picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4 Circular
The Circular section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the circular components in available
for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.4.1 Straight
The Circular Straight picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.2 Male Coupling

The Circular Male Coupling picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.3 Taper
The Circular Taper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.4 Mitred Offset

The Circular Mitred Offset picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.5 Mitred Elbow

The Circular Mitred Elbow picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.6 Radius Bend

The Circular Radius Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.7 3 Segment Bend

The Circular 3 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.8 4 Segment Bend

The Circular 4 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.9 5 Segment Bend

The Circular 5 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.10 Radius Threeway

The Circular Radius Threeway picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:29 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.11 Cap End

The Circular Cap End picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.12 Material Connection

The Circular Material Connection picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:30 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.13 Flexible Tube

The Circular Flexible Tube picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.14 Flexible Bend

The Circular Flexible Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:31 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.15 Circular Weather Cowl

The Circular Weather Cowl picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.16 Two Bend Setfill

The Circular Two Bend Setfill picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:32 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.17 Two Bend Flexfill

The Circular Two Bend Flexfill picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:33 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.18 Circular Stiffener

The Circular Stiffener picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.19 Access Panel

The Circular Access Panel picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:34 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.20 Saddle
The Circular Saddle picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.21 Mesh End

The Circular Mesh End picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:35 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.22 Test Holes

The Circular Test Holes picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.23 Internal Damper

The Circular Internal Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:36 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.24 Gasket
The Circular Gasket picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.25 Breeches
The Circular Breeches picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:37 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.4.26 Angled Breeches

The Circular Angled Breeches picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.4.27 Tee Piece

The Circular Tee Piece picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:38 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5 Flat Oval

The Flat Oval section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the flat oval components in
available for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.5.1 Straight
The Flat Oval Straight picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:39 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.2 Male Coupling

The Flat Oval Male Coupling picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.3 Flat Oval Taper

The Flat Oval Taper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:40 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.4 End Cap

The Flat Oval End Cap picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.5 ‘A’ Plane Mitred Offset

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Plane Mitred Offset picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:41 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.6 ‘B’ Plane Mitred Offset

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Plane Mitred Offset picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.7 ‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Plane Mitred Elbow picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:42 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.8 ‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Plane Mitred Elbow picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.9 ‘A’ Plane 3 Segment Bend

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Plane 3 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:43 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.10 ‘B’ Plane 3 Segment Bend

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Plane 3 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.11 ‘A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:44 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.12 ‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Plane 4 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.13 ‘A’ Plane 5 Segment Bend

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Plane 5 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:45 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.5.14 ‘B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.5.15 Gasket
The Flat Oval Gasket picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.6 Transformations
The Transformations section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the transformation
components in available for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:46 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.6.1 Square to Round

The Square to Round Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.6.2 Square to Flatoval

The Square to Flatoval Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:47 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.6.3 Flatoval to Round

The Flatoval to Round Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.6.4 Oval A to Oval B

The Oval A to Oval B Transformation in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:48 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.6.5 Circular to Rectangular Spigot Box

The Circular to Rectangular Spigot Box Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue
is an illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.6.6 Circular to Linear Plenum

The Circular to Linear Plenum Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:49 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.6.7 Circular to Rectangular Spigot Plate

The Circular to Rectangular Spigot Plate Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue
is an illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.6.8 Flat Oval to Rectangular Spigot Box

The Flat Oval to Rectangular Spigot Box Transformation picture in the HVAC Catalogue
is an illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:50 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7 Branch Connectors

The Branch Connectors section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the branch connector
components available for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.7.1 Rectangular Boot

The Rectangular Boot Branch Connector in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:51 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.2 Rectangular Square

The Rectangular Square Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:52 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.3 Rectangular Fish

The Rectangular Fish Branch Connector shown in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.7.4 Rectangular Angled

The Rectangular Angled Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:53 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.5 Rectangular Tapered

The Rectangular Tapered Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:54 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.6 Circular Boot

The Circular Boot Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.7.7 Circular Square

The Circular Square Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:55 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.8 Circular Fish

The Circular Fish Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:56 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.9 Circular Angled

The Circular Angled Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.7.10 Circular Conical

The Circular Conical Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:57 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.11 Square Round

The Square Round Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:58 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.12 Circular Mitred

The Circular Mitred Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.7.13 Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:59 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.14 Flat Oval ‘B’ Boot

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:60 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.15 Flat Oval ‘A’ Square

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Square Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.7.16 Flat Oval ‘B’ Square

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Square Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:61 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.17 Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:62 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.18 Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.7.19 Flat Oval ‘A’ Angled

The Flat Oval ‘A’ Angled Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:63 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.7.20 Flat Oval ‘B’ Angled

The Flat Oval ‘B’ Angled Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:64 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8 Inline Plant Equipment

The Inline Plant Equipment section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the inline plant
equipment available for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.8.1 Rectangular Fire Damper

The Rectangular Fire Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.2 Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper

The Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:65 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.3 Rectangular Control Damper

The Rectangular Control Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:66 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.4 Rectangular Motorised Damper

The Rectangular Motorised Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.5 Rectangular Heater Battery

The Rectangular Heater Battery picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:67 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.6 Rectangular Cooler Battery

The Rectangular Cooler Battery picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.7 Rectangular Silencer

The Rectangular Silencer picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:68 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.8 Rectangular Attenuated Bend

The Rectangular Attenuated Bend picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:69 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.9 Rectangular General Plant Item

The Rectangular General Plant Item picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.10 Rectangular Grille Off Branch Connector

The Rectangular Grille Off Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:70 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.11 Rectangular Grille (in line)

The Rectangular Grille (in line) picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:71 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.12 Air Handling Unit

The Air Handling Unit picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.13 Centrifugal Fan

The Rectangular Centrifugal Fan picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:72 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.14 Circular Fire Damper

The Circular Fire Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.15 Circular Flanged Fire Damper

The Circular Flanged Fire Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:73 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.16 Circular Control Damper

The Circular Control Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:74 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.17 Circular Axial Flow Fan

The Circular Axial Flow Fan picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.18 Circular Silencer

The Circular Silencer picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the parameterised
geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:75 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.19 Circular General Plant Item

The Circular General Plant Item picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.8.20 Circular Grille Off Branch Connector

The Circular Grille Off Branch Connector picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:76 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.21 Circular Grille (in line)

The Circular Grille (in line) picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:77 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.8.22 Flat Oval Fire Damper

The Flat Oval Fire Damper picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9 Extra Plant Equipment

The Extra Plant Equipment section of the HVAC Catalogue shows all the extra plant
equipment available for selection in the catalogue database (in an illustrative format).

20.9.1 Flat Low Velocity Terminal

The Flat Low Velocity Terminal picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:78 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.9.2 Semi Circular Air Displacement Unit

The Semi Circular Air Displacement Unit picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration
of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9.3 Circular Air Displacement Unit

The Circular Air Displacement Unit picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:79 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.9.4 LV Terminal for Corner Mounting

The LV Terminal for Corner Mounting picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:80 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.9.5 Rectangular Air Displacement Unit

The Rectangular Air Displacement Unit picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9.6 Rectangular Air Displacement Unit with Rectangular Connection

The LV Terminal for Corner Mounting picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:81 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.9.7 Connection Box ‘Circ Inlet - Circ Outlet’

The Connection Box ‘Circ Inlet - Circ Outlet’ picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9.8 Connection Box with ‘Circ Inlet - Rect Outlet’

The Connection Box with ‘Circ Inlet - Rect Outlet’ picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9.9 Circular Diffuser with Circular Inlet

The Circular Diffuser with Circular Inlet picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of
the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:82 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.9.10 Rectangular Diffuser with Circular Inlet

The Rectangular Diffuser with Circular Inlet picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9.11 Rectangular Grille with Rectangular Inlet’

The Rectangular Grille with Rectangular Inlet picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an
illustration of the parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:83 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.9.12 Circular Air Intake Hood

The Circular Air Intake Hood picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.9.13 Circular Air Extract Hood

The Circular Air Extract Hood picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:84 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.10 HVAC Equipment Nozzles

The HVAC Equipment Nozzles picture in the HVAC Catalogue is an illustration of the
parameterised geometry of the actual piece of HVAC.

20.11 Types of Joint

The joints available for use on the HVAC components are listed below.

20.11.1 Pre-defined Joints for Components of Any Shape

MALE or M Socket and spigot male connection

FEMA or F Socket and spigot female connection

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:85 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

FJ25 25x25x3 (1”x1”x1/8”) equal angle section joint

FJ303 30x30x3 (11/4”x11/4”x1/8”) equal angle section joint

FJ30 30x30x4 (11/4”x11/4”x3/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ40 40x40x4 (11/2”x11/2”x3/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ45 45x45x4 (13/4”x13/4”x3/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ50 50x50x5 (2”x2”x3/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ60 60x60x6 (21/4”x21/4”x1/4”) equal angle section joint

FJ608 60x60x8 (21/4”x21/4”x5/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ6550 65x50x6 (21/2”x2”x1/4”) unequal angle section joint

FJ65 65x65x6 (21/2”x21/2”x1/4”) equal angle section joint

FJ70 70x70x7 (23/4”x23/4”x5/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ7550 75x50x6 (3”x2”x1/4”) unequal angle section joint

FJ75 75x75x7 (3”x3”x5/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ8060 80x60x6 (31/4”x21/4”x1/4”) unequal angle section joint

FJ80 80x80x8 (31/4”x31/4”x5/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ8010 80x80x10 (31/4”x31/4”x3/8”) equal angle section joint

FJ90 90x90x9 (31/2”x31/2”x7/16”) equal angle section joint

FJ10065 100x65x6 (4”x21/2”x3/8”) unequal angle section joint

FJ10080 100x80x8 (4”x31/4”x3/8”) unequal angle section joint

FJ100 100x100x8 (4”x4”x3/8”) equal angle section joint

FB253 25x3 (1”x1/8”) flat bar joint

FB254 25x4 (1”x5/32”) flat bar joint

FB304 30x4 (11/4”x5/32”) flat bar joint

FB305 30x5 (11/4”x3/16”) flat bar joint

FB354 35x4 (13/8”x5/32”) flat bar joint

FB405 40x5 (11/2”x3/16”) flat bar joint

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:86 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

FB505 50x5 (2”x3/16”) flat bar joint

FB606 60x6 (21/4”x1/4”) flat bar joint

FB6010 60x10 (21/4”x3/8”) flat bar joint

FB8010 80x10 (31/4”x3/8”) flat bar joint

FB8012 80x12 (31/4”x1/2”) flat bar joint

CH7638 76x38 (3”x11/2”) rectangular channel section joint

CH10251 102x51 (4”x2”) rectangular channel section joint

CH12763 127x63 (5”x21/2”) rectangular channel section joint

CH15276 152x76 (6”x3”) rectangular channel section joint

RE Raw edge

SF25 Self flange 25mm (1”)

SF40 Self flange 40mm (11/2”)

SF50 Self flange 50mm (2”)

WELD or W Welded joint for branch connector or attachment fixed to a duct

20.11.2 Pre-defined Joints for Rectangular Components Only

RE25 Raw edge, longitudinal seam notched back 25 (1”)

RE40 Raw edge, longitudinal seam notched back 40 (11/2”)

RE50 Raw edge, longitudinal seam notched back 50 (2”)

DM30 Ductmate™ 30mm (11/8”) flange

DM40 Ductmate™ 40mm (11/2”) flange

IDC Integral duct connector

IDF Integral duct flange

VM20 Verromez™ 20mm (3/4”) flange

VM30 Verromez™ 30mm (11/8”) flange

VM40 Verromez™ 40mm (11/2”) flange

FLAT For spigot plates only

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:87 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

20.11.3 User-defined Joints

It is possible for the user to define the joints for rectangular, circular and flat oval ductwork.
For further information refer to the HVAC Administrator Guide.

20.12 Types of Stiffener

The stiffeners available for use on the HVAC components are listed below:

20.12.1 Pre-defined Stiffeners

25 25x25x3 (1” x 1” x 1/8”) angle stiffener

30 30x30x4 (11/4” x 11/4” x 3/16”) angle stiffener

40 40x40x4 (11/2” x 11/2” x 3/16”) angle stiffener

50 50x50x5 (2” x 2” x 3/16”) angle stiffener

60 60x60x6 (21/4” x 21/4” x 1/4”) angle stiffener

65 65x65x6 (21/2” x 21/2” x 1/4”) angle stiffener

70 70x70x7 (23/4” x 23/4” x 5/16”) angle stiffener

80 80x80x8 (31/4” x 31/4” x 5/16”) angle stiffener

90 90x90x9 (31/2” x 31/2” x 7/16”) angle stiffener

100 100x100x10 (4” x 4” x 3/8”) angle stiffener

6550 65x50x6 (21/2” x 2” x 1/4”) angle stiffener

7550 75x50x6 (3” x 2” x 1/4”) angle stiffener

8060 80x60x6 (31/4” x 21/4” x 1/4”) angle stiffener

10065 100x65x6 (4” x 21/2” x 3/8”) angle stiffener

10080 100x80x8 (4” x 31/4” x 3/8”) angle stiffener

253 25x3 (1” x 1/8”) flat bar stiffener

254 25x4 (1” x 5/32”) flat bar stiffener

304 30x4 (11/4” x 5/32”) flat bar stiffener

305 30x5 (11/4” x 3/16”) flat bar stiffener

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:88 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

354 35x4 (13/8” x 5/32”) flat bar stiffener

405 40x5 (11/2” x 3/16”) flat bar stiffener

505 50x5 (2” x 3/16”) flat bar stiffener

606 60x6 (21/4” x 1/4”) flat bar stiffener

6010 60x10 (21/4” x 3/8”) flat bar stiffener

8010 80x10 (31/4” x 3/8”) flat bar stiffener

8012 80x12 (31/4” x 1/2”) angle stiffener

303 30x30x3 (11/4” x 11/4” x 1/8”) angle stiffener

608 60x60x8 (21/4” x 21/4” x 5/16”) angle stiffener

801 80x80x10 (31/4” x 31/4” x 3/8”) angle stiffener

7638 76x38 (3” x 11/2”) channel stiffener

10251 102x51 (4” x 2”) channel stiffener

12763 127x63 (5” x 21/2”) channel stiffener

15276 152x76 (6” x 3”) channel stiffener

20.12.2 User-defined Stiffeners

It is possible for the user to define the stiffener sizes and codes. For further information refer
to the HVAC Administrator Guide.

20.13 Design Parameters and Properties

Use the design parameters allocated to the catalogue components, with their corresponding
property code and a brief description as an aid to compile reports.

Des. Param. Property Description

DESP[1] DESC Description (Word)

DESP[2] AARR Ductsize A of arrive

DESP[3] BARR Ductsize B of arrive

DESP[4] ALEA Ductsize A of leave

DESP[5] BLEA Ductsize B of leave

DESP[6] LENG Length

DESP[7] BRLE Branch length

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:89 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

Des. Param. Property Description

DESP[8] ANGL Angle

DESP[9] RADI Radius

DESP[10 AOFF A offset

DESP[11] BOFF B offset

DESP[12] ATHR Arrive throat

DESP[13] LTHR Leave throat

DESP[14] SEGS No. of segments

DESP[15] AEXT Arrive extension

DESP[16] ANOT Arrive notch

DESP[17] LEXT Leave extension

DESP[18] LNOT Leave notch

DESP[19] BEXT Branch extension

DESP[20] BNOT Branch notch

DESP[21] AJA A of arrive joint

DESP[22] AJB B of arrive joint

DESP[23] AJC C of arrive joint

DESP[24] LJA A of leave joint

DESP[25] LJB B of leave joint

DESP[26] LJC C of leave joint

DESP[27] BJA A of branch joint

DESP[28] BJB B of branch joint

DESP[29] BJC C of branch joint

DESP[30] FACE Face (RECT, CIRC, OVAL)

DESP[31] ITEM Item Number

DESP[32] MATL Material

DESP[33] GAUG Gauge

DESP[34] SEAM Longitudinal seam (Word)

DESP[35] STOC Stock number

DESP[36] WKSF Works fitted (TRUE, FALS)

DESP[37] SPLI Splitters

DESP[38] SEAL Sealant (Word)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:90 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

Des. Param. Property Description

DESP[39] SWAG Swage (TRUE, FALS)

DESP[40] SHAP Shape (RECT, CIRC, OVAL, TRAN)

DESP[41] ABRA Ductsize A of branch

DESP[42] BBRA Ductsize B of branch

DESP[43] BRAD Radius B

DESP[44] ATRN Airturns

DESP[45] ATSI Airturn size

DESP[46] REXT Rectangular extension

DESP[47] CEXT Circular extension

DESP[48] FEXT Oval extension

DESP[49] CLHE Centreline height

DESP[50] STAT Status

DESP[51] MANU Manufacturer (Word)

DESP[52] TEXT General text (Word)

DESP[53] NOTE Note (Word)

DESP[54] HEIG Height

DESP[55] WR Width Right

DESP[56] WL Width Left

DESP[57] BOTT Bottom

DESP[58] ARRJ Arrive joint (Word)

DESP[59] LEAJ Leave joint (Word)

DESP[60] BJNT Branch joint (Word)

DESP[61] CRAD Radius C

DESP[62] DRAD Radius D

DESP[63] BANG Angle B

DESP[64] FJNT Fixing joint (Word)

DESP[65] FVAL Fixing joint size

DESP[66] TYPE Item type (Word)

DESP[67] SUBT Item subtype (Word)

DESP[68] AVAL Arrive joint size

DESP[69] LVAL Leave joint size

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:91 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide
HVAC Catalogue

Des. Param. Property Description

DESP[70] BVAL Branch joint size

DESP[71] Clash volume to outer limits

DESP[72] Clash volume to PA

DESP[73] Clash volume to PL

DESP[74] Clash volume Y

DESP[75] Clash volume -Y

DESP[76] Miscellaneous

DESP[77] Miscellaneous

DESP[78] AHOL No of holes in arrive flange

DESP[79] LHOL No of holes in leave flange

DESP[80] BHOL No of holes in branch flange

DESP[81] ISRF Internal surface area (m2)

DESP[82] ESRF External surface area (m2)

DESP[83] TSRF Total surface area (m2)

DESP[84] KGMC Mass density (kg/m3)

DESP[85] SWEI Sheet weight (kg)

DESP[86] FWEI Flanges weight (kg)

DESP[87] TWEI Total component weight (kg)

DESP[88] Surface Units

DESP[89] IWEI Insulation weight

DESP[90] Miscellaneous

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 20:92 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Index

Numerics Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:258

Air Handling Unit
3 Segment Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:211
‘A’ plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:113 Air Intake Hood
‘B’ Plane Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:257
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:115 Angled Breeches
3 Segment Bend Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:74
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:64 Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:272
4 Segment Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
‘A’ Plane Attenuated Bend
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:117 Rectangular General Plant Item . 20:70
‘B’ Plane Attenuated Bend r
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:119 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:203
4 Segment Bend Autofill with Straights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:66 Axial Flow Fan c
5 Segment Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:221
‘A’ Plane
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:121
‘B’ Plane
B
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:123 Boot
5 Segment Bend Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:150
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:68 Branch Connector
Circular Angled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:57
A Circular Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:55
Circular Conical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:57
Access Panel Circular Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:56
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:91 Circular Mitred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:59
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:128 Circular Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:55
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:37 Flat Oval ‘A’ Angled . . . . . . . . . . . 20:63
Add Spool Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:8 Flat Oval ‘A’ Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:59
Air Displacement Flat Oval ‘A’ Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:62
Semi-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:238 Flat Oval ‘A’ Square . . . . . . . . . . . 20:61
Air Displacement Unit Flat Oval ‘B’ Angled . . . . . . . . . . . 20:64
Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:242 Flat Oval ‘B’ Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:60
Air Extract Hood

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Flat Oval ‘B’ Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:63 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:72

Flat Oval ‘B’ Square . . . . . . . . . . . 20:61 Breeches Threeway
Rectangular Angled . . . . . . . . . . . 20:53 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:22
Rectangular Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:51
Rectangular Fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:53 C
Rectangular Square . . . . . . . . . . . 20:52
Rectangular Tapered . . . . . . . . . . 20:54 Cap End
Square Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:58 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:79
Branch Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:150 Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:125
‘A’ Boot Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:26
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:174 Centrifugal Fan r
‘A’ Square Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:214
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:178 Circ Diffuser - Circ Inlet . . . . . . . . . . 19:251
‘B’ Angled Circular
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:188 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:54
‘B’ Boot 3 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:27
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:176 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:28
‘B’ Fish 5 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:29
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:184 Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:34
‘B’ Square Angled Breeches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:38
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:180 Breeches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:37
’A’ Angled Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:30
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:186 Flexible Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:31
’A’ Fish Flexible Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:31
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:182 Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:37
Angled Internal Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:36
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:166 Male Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:24
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:156 Material Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 20:30
Boot Mesh End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:35
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:161 Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:26
Conical Mitred Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:25
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:168 Radius Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:27
Fish Radius Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:29
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:164 Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:35
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:154 Stiffener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:34
Mitred Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:23
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:172 Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:25
Square Tee Piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:38
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:162 Test Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:36
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:152 Two Bend Flexfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:33
Square-Round Two Bend Setfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:32
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:170 Weather Cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:32
Tapered Component
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:158 Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1 Component Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Main Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Create/Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2 Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 Connection Box
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:2 Circ-Circ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:246
Side Branch (off main) . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Circ-Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:248
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Control Damper
Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:194
Breeches Control Damper c

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:219 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:190

Cooler Battery r Fire Damper c
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:200 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:215
Copy Flanged
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:217
Crank Offset Fire Damper f
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:12 Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:231
Cranked Taper Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:100
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:4 ’A’ Plane 3 Segment Bend . . . . . . 20:43
Create Group window - populated . . . . 11:4 ’A’ Plane 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . 20:44
’A’ Plane 5 Segment Bend . . . . . . 20:45
D ’A’ Plane Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . 20:42
’A’ Plane Mitred Offset . . . . . . . . . 20:41
Deflectrol ’B’ 4 Segment Bend . . . . . . . . . . . 20:45
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:47 ’B’ Mitred Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:42
Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 ’B’ Plane 3 Segment Bend . . . . . . 20:44
Design Parameters and Properties . . . 20:89 ’B’ Plane 5 Segment Bend . . . . . . 20:46
Displacement Unit ’B’ Plane Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . 20:43
Circ Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:240 End Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:41
Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:46
E Male Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:40
Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:39
Equipment Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:40
Nozzle Flexible Bend
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:262 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:84
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:264 Flexible Tube
MODIFY Existing Nozzle . . . 19:266 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:82
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:260
Equipment Nozzles . . . . . . . . 19:260, 20:85
G
Extra Plant Equipment
Circular Air Displacement Unit . . . 20:79 Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:132
Circular Air Extract Hood . . . . . . . 20:84 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:99
Circular Air Intake Hood . . . . . . . . 20:84 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:51
Circular Diffuser with Circular Inlet 20:82 General Plant Item c
Connection Box ‘Circ Inlet - Circ Outlet’ Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:225
20:82 General Plant Item r
Connection Box ‘Circ Inlet - Rect Outlet’ Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:205
20:82 Grille brco r
Flat Low Velocity Terminal . . . . . . 20:78 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:207
LV Terminal for Corner Mounting . 20:80 Grille in line c
Rectangular Air Displacement Unit 20:81 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:229
Rectangular Air Displacement Unit Rectan- Grille in line r
gular Connection . . . . . . . 20:81 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:210
Rectangular Diffuser with Circular Inlet . Grille off brco c
20:83 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:227
Rectangular Grille with Rectangular Inlet Group Created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
20:83 Guide Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Semi Circular Air Displacement Unit 20:79
H
F
Heater Battery r
Fire Damper Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:198
Flanged Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:192 Branch Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Component Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 J

Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 Joints
Spool Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3 Pre-defined joints for components of any
Spools Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2 shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:85
HVAC Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1 Pre-defined Joints for Rectangular Compo-
Basic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:1 nents only . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:87
HVAC Command Output window - C of G calcu- Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:85
lations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5 User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:88
HVAC Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
HVAC Sketches L
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
HVAC Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Layout Grid from SOP
Available Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3 Tiles/Grid Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2 Linear Plenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:144
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6 LV Terminal
Copy ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8 Corner Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:236
Edit Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4 M
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Modify CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9 Main Branch Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Male Coupling
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:55
I Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:101
Inline Plant Equipment Marker as assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:12
Air Handling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:72 Material Connection
Centrifugal Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:72 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:81
Circular Axial Flow Fan . . . . . . . . 20:75 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:29
Circular Control Damper . . . . . . . . 20:74 Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
Circular Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . . 20:73 Merge Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:13
Circular Flanged Fire Damper . . . 20:73 Mesh End
Circular General Plant Item . . . . . 20:76 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:80
Circular Grille (in line) . . . . . . . . . . 20:77 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:28
Circular Grille off branch connector 20:76 Mitred Elbow
Circular Silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:75 ’A’ Plane
Flat Oval Fire Damper . . . . . . . . . 20:78 Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:109
Rectangular Attenuated Bend . . . 20:69 ’B’ Plane
Rectangular Control Damper . . . . 20:66 Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:111
Rectangular Cooler Battery . . . . . 20:68 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:60
Rectangular Fire Damper . . . . . . . 20:65 Mitred Offset
Rectangular Flanged Fire Damper 20:65 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:58
Rectangular Grille (in line) . . . . . . 20:71 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:14
Rectangular Grille off branch connector Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:7
20:70 Modify
Rectangular Heater Battery . . . . . 20:67 CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Rectangular Motorised Damper . . 20:67 Modify User Defined HVAC Fittings . 19:272
Rectangular Silencer . . . . . . . . . . 20:68 Motorised Damper r
Internal Damper Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:196
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:97
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:49 O
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Offset
‘A’ Plane
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:105

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

‘B’ Plane Crank Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:7

Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:107 Cranked Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:4
Oval ‘A’ to Oval ‘B’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:140 Deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:21
Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:22
P Internal Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:21
Material Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 20:13
Palettes Mesh End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:13
Branch Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:4 Mitred Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:10, 20:6
Circular Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:2 Mitred Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:8
Extra Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:6 Radius Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:5
Flat Oval Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:3 Radius Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:9
Inline Plant Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 18:5 Radius Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:20
Nozzle Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:6 Radius Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:9
Rectangular Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . 18:1 Square Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:5
Shape Transformations Items . . . . 18:4 Square Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:12
Stiffener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15
Q Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3
Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:3
Query Data Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1 Test Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:17
Gap to Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 Turning Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:23
Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1 Two Bend Setfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:15
Brief Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1 Two Bend Threeway . . . . . . . . . . 20:10
Detailing Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2 Weather Skirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:14
Insulation Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2 Remove Spool Elements . . . . . . . . . . . 12:9
Item Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1 Roof Cowl
Taper Side Angles . . . . . . . . . . 13:2 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:85
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 Round to Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:138
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3
Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3
S
P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
PA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3 Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:130
PH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:93
PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4 Setting a Default Detailing Specification 2:3
PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:5 Side Branch (off main) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1
Side Branch Tee
R Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:76
Silencer c
Radiused Bend Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:223
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:62 Silencer r
Radiused Bend Rectangular . . . . . . . . . 19:8 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:201
Radiused Offset Spigot Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:142
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:16 Spigot Plate
Radiused Threeway Circ>Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:146
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:70 Oval>Rect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:148
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:18 Spilt HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Rect Diffuser - Circ Inlet . . . . . . . . . . 19:253 Branches to Spilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:2
Rect Disp Unit - Rect Conn . . . . . . . . 19:244 Modify Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:6
Rect Grille - Rect Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:255 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:5
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:1 Plane Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:4
’A’ Plane Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:18 Position & Orientation . . . . . . . . . . 15:5
’B’ Plane Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:19 Reposition Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:16 Explicitly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Breeches Threeway . . . . . . . . . . . 20:11 Relatively By . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Cap End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:12 Split Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:11

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Split Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:7 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:52

Splitter Twin Bend Threeway
’A’ Plane Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:20
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:41 Two Bend Flexfill
’B’ Plane Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:88
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:43 Two Bend Setfill
Radiused Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:87
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:45 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:33
Spool list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:5
Spool Manager name inserted . . . . . . . 12:2 U
spools created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Spools verified successful . . . . . . . . . . . 12:7 User Defined Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:268
Square Bend User Defined Fittings Plotfile . . . . . . 19:270
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:6 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Square Threeway Assemblies
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:24 Assembly Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Square to Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:136 Autofill
Square to Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:134 Fill Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3
Stiffeners Show Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Pre-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:88 Automatic Itemising . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:88 Centre of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
User-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:89 Create a Group . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Stiffening Data Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:89 HVAC Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:126 Application Dataworld Hierarchy 8:2
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:35 Create Assembly Area Element 8:2
Straight Create Assembly Element . . . . . 8:3
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:54 Create Assembly World Element 8:2
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:100 HVAC Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:2 HVAC Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
System Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1, 19:1 Surface Area & Weight . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Tiles/Grid Utility
Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 Apply Tiles in Grid . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Grid Setting Out Point . . . . . . . . 9:1
T Layout Grid from SOP . . . . . . . . 9:3

Taper V
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:56
Flat Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:103 Vel’ Terminal
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:2 Flat Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:233
Test Point Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:6
Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:95
Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:39 W
Tiles/Grid Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:134 Weather Skirt
Circular to Linear Plenum . . . . . . . 20:49 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19:31
Circular to Rectangular Spigot Box 20:49 Work Area
Circular to Rectangular Spigot Plate 20:50 Customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Flat Oval to Round Spigot Box . . . 20:50 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Flatoval to Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:48 Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Oval A to Oval B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:48 Local Views Shade 17:3
Square to Flatoval . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:47 OK/Cancel Forms 17:4
Square to Round . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20:47 Show Forms 17:4
Turning Vanes

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

Show Local Views 17:2

Show Pixmaps 17:4
HVAC Window
Plane Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . 17:5
HVAC window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:5
Work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 HVAC User Guide

© Copyright 1974 to current year. Index page 8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.